WO2013077052A1 - Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program - Google Patents

Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013077052A1
WO2013077052A1 PCT/JP2012/071716 JP2012071716W WO2013077052A1 WO 2013077052 A1 WO2013077052 A1 WO 2013077052A1 JP 2012071716 W JP2012071716 W JP 2012071716W WO 2013077052 A1 WO2013077052 A1 WO 2013077052A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
radio base
handover
station apparatus
radio
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2012/071716
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
村上憲一
山本裕嗣
山本剛史
田中義三
岡田洋侍
Original Assignee
住友電気工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2012092630A external-priority patent/JP5263563B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2012092629A external-priority patent/JP6111529B2/en
Application filed by 住友電気工業株式会社 filed Critical 住友電気工業株式会社
Publication of WO2013077052A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013077052A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • H04W36/302Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data due to low signal strength
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a radio base station apparatus, a radio terminal apparatus, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program, and more particularly, in a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation.
  • the present invention relates to a radio base station apparatus, a radio terminal apparatus, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program.
  • a communication service is provided by a radio base station apparatus (hereinafter also referred to as a macro base station) that forms an area in which a cell having a radius of several hundred meters to several tens of kilometers, that is, a radio terminal apparatus can communicate. It was.
  • a radio base station apparatus hereinafter also referred to as a macro base station
  • the radius of the femto cell formed by this small base station (hereinafter also referred to as a femto base station) is as small as about 10 meters, so the femto base station is the macro cell formed by the macro base station. It may be used in places such as indoors and underground malls where it is out of service area and it is difficult to install macro base stations.
  • femto base stations since many femto base stations are installed in a specific area, it is difficult to connect the femto base stations directly to the core network. For this reason, it is conceivable that a large number of femto base stations installed in a specific area are once connected to a gateway device such as a HeNB-GW, and the femto base station and the core network are connected via the HeNB-GW.
  • a gateway device such as a HeNB-GW
  • a pico base station that forms a pico cell with a radius of 100 to 200 meters, for example, has been developed based on a macro base station.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 In a heterogeneous network that is a communication system in which such femto base stations, pico base stations, and macro base stations are mixed, for example, a plurality of femto cells or pico cells are formed in a macro cell. For this reason, handover of a radio terminal device is likely to occur, and the situation of handover is complicated, so that an inappropriate handover operation is performed such as the timing of handover being too early or too late (For example, see 3GPP TR 36.902 V9.3.1 2011.3 (Non-Patent Document 1)).
  • Non-Patent Document 1 When an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system. A technique for suppressing such an inappropriate handover operation and constructing a good communication system is desired.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a radio base station apparatus capable of stabilizing communication by appropriately controlling a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, To provide a wireless terminal device, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program.
  • a radio base station apparatus transmits a radio signal to / from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system in which the radio terminal apparatus can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation.
  • a radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving, for requesting the other radio base station apparatus to perform a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus
  • the handover instruction unit receives the response, and receives the response from the wireless base station device and the wireless terminal device. When a predetermined execution condition regarding the quality of communication is not satisfied, or suspend abort the application of the instruction to the wireless terminal device.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the handover instruction unit stops the handover operation without giving the instruction to the wireless terminal device. To the other radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit receives the response and waits until the execution condition is satisfied when the execution condition is not satisfied, and when the execution condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal Give the above instructions to the device.
  • the handover operation instruction is given to the radio terminal apparatus Therefore, the handover operation can be executed at the optimal timing.
  • the handover instruction unit does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device and performs the handover operation.
  • the other radio base station apparatus is notified of the cancellation.
  • the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. Therefore, the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied.
  • the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
  • the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied.
  • the cancellation condition is a condition related to communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the wireless terminal apparatus, and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the communication quality indicated by the cancellation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition.
  • the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
  • the handover instructing unit notifies the other radio base station device that the handover operation is stopped, the communication quality between the own radio base station device and the radio terminal device satisfies a condition. Notify the other radio base station apparatus that the mobile station has not been connected.
  • the other radio base station apparatus can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting related to the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent occurrence of unnecessary processes such as new parameter setting processes in other radio base station apparatuses and appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
  • the radio base station apparatus further includes a handover condition adjustment unit for adjusting a difference between the communication quality indicated by the execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition.
  • Such a configuration makes it possible to adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of canceling handover operations, thereby realizing more appropriate handover operations.
  • the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied.
  • the radio base station apparatus further adjusts a difference between the communication quality indicated by the execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition, and the handover instruction unit cancels the handover operation by another radio base station.
  • a handover condition adjusting unit is provided for adjusting the difference based on the number of times notified to the apparatus.
  • Such a configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of cancellation of handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of handover operation cancellation.
  • the radio base station apparatus further obtains the number of times that the handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus is inappropriate.
  • An information acquisition unit is provided, and the handover condition adjustment unit adjusts the difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquisition unit.
  • a communication control method is a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • a communication control program transmits / receives a radio signal to / from a wireless terminal device in a communication system in which the wireless terminal device can communicate with a plurality of wireless base station devices by performing a handover operation.
  • the handover operation is stopped without giving the instruction to the radio terminal apparatus. To the other radio base station apparatus.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the handover request unit makes the request to the plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
  • the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation with other neighboring base stations is completed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
  • the handover instruction unit receives the response, selects a handover destination radio base station device from the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response, and transmits the response to the radio terminal device.
  • An instruction to perform the handover operation is given to the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the amount of information is larger than when a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction.
  • the instruction content can be simplified.
  • the handover instruction unit obtains a measurement result of received power in the radio terminal device of a radio signal transmitted from the other radio base station device corresponding to the response. Then, based on the measurement result, the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected.
  • the handover instruction unit excludes the other radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates.
  • a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates.
  • An appropriate radio base station apparatus can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit receives the response and transmits information indicating the other radio base station device corresponding to the response as a handover destination candidate to the radio terminal device.
  • the configuration in which the radio terminal device selects the handover destination radio base station device, the handover destination radio base station device according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source radio base station device selects Can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, and the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the received information The predetermined information is transmitted to.
  • the handover instruction unit after the handover operation is completed, of the other radio base station apparatuses other than the handover destination radio base station apparatus among the other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the response.
  • a request for canceling the handover operation is transmitted to.
  • the radio terminal apparatus In the case of moving in the direction approaching, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
  • the radio base station apparatus performs the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination as the handover operation preparation process of the radio terminal apparatus. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need.
  • a radio terminal apparatus is a radio terminal apparatus capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from the radio base station apparatus and performing a handover operation.
  • a receiving unit for receiving information indicating a plurality of other radio base station devices as handover destination candidates from a serving base station that is a radio base station device that has established a communication connection with itself; and
  • a selection unit for selecting a handover destination radio base station device from among the plurality of other radio base station devices indicated by the received information, and the handover destination radio base station device selected by the selection unit
  • a communication control unit for newly establishing a communication connection with the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the configuration in which the radio terminal device selects the handover destination radio base station device, the handover destination radio base station device according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source radio base station device selects Can be selected.
  • a communication system for managing a plurality of radio base station apparatuses for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio terminal apparatus, and one or more radio base station apparatuses.
  • a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to a corresponding communication control device.
  • the corresponding communication control apparatus when the other radio base station apparatus to be handed over indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the other communication control apparatus, manages the other radio base station apparatus.
  • the other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the other radio base station apparatus.
  • the response to the handover request is received from the corresponding communication control apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmits the handover request source.
  • the wireless base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal apparatus is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended.
  • the radio base station apparatus sends the handover request to the corresponding communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied.
  • the communication quality that is transmitted and indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the communication control device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of the other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and Each of the other radio base station devices shown is determined whether it is a management target of itself, and if it is not a management target of itself, the handover to another communication control device that manages the other radio base station device Send a request.
  • the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation with other neighboring base stations is completed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
  • a communication system for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device, and one or more radio base station devices.
  • the communication control device is connected between the one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the higher level network, transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the higher level network, and
  • a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from a higher-level network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device transmits another wireless base station from itself
  • a handover request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device to a station device is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device
  • a communication path that enables relaying of the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network is created, and in response to the communication path creation request
  • a communication path creation response is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device
  • the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station device, and when a response to the handover request is received from the other radio base station device, the radio base station that is the transmission source of the handover request
  • a handover instruction is transmitted to the apparatus, the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and If the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation on the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended.
  • the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied.
  • the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the gateway device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • the communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and indicates the handover request indicated by the handover request.
  • a gateway apparatus connected between the radio base station apparatus and the upper network, and a gateway connected between the other radio base station apparatus and the upper network It is determined whether or not the device is different, and the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device determined to be different.
  • the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation with other neighboring base stations is completed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
  • a communication control method is for managing a plurality of radio base station apparatuses for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal apparatus and one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses.
  • a communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device responds to a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device.
  • the step of transmitting to the communication control device, and the corresponding communication control device, when the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the other radio base station device A step of transmitting the handover request to another communication control device that manages the communication, and the other communication control device transmits the received handover request to the Transmitting the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus upon receiving a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus Receiving the response from the communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request, and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the terminal device is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device is given. Suspending or deferring.
  • a communication control method is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • the communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network
  • a communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device A handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from the mobile station to another radio base station device is transmitted to the communication control device
  • a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request, and a communication between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus when the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition related to quality is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended. Steps.
  • the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • a communication control program manages a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • a communication program used in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the wireless base station device performs handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device in a computer
  • a step of transmitting a request to the corresponding communication control device and when the other radio base station device at the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the corresponding communication control device,
  • the step of transmitting the handover request to another communication control apparatus that manages the radio base station apparatus, and the other communication control apparatus Transmitting the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, receiving the response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, and transmitting the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus;
  • the communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base
  • a communication control program is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • the communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network,
  • a communication program used in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, the computer storing the wireless base station A handheld device that performs a handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device.
  • a gateway device connected between the wireless base station device and the higher-level network; and the other handover destination indicated by the handover request.
  • a communication path creation request is connected between the other wireless base station device and the upper network.
  • the gateway device Transmitting to the gateway device; and when the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the upper network transmitted from the wireless terminal device Create a communication path that can relay communication data to A communication path creation response to the communication control apparatus, and when the communication control apparatus receives the communication path creation response, the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio
  • a response to the handover request is received from the base station device, a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the wireless base station device that is a transmission source of the handover request; and the wireless base station device receives the handover instruction, and It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal apparatus is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, an instruction for performing a handover operation for the wireless terminal apparatus is issued. This is a program for executing the step of canceling or holding the grant.
  • the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of an improper handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection process in the radio
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the improper handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection process in the radio
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A3 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows event A4 which a radio
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A5 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the timing control of the hand-over operation by adjustment of hysteresis HS in the radio
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating timing control of a handover operation by adjusting an offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the control part in the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 28 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG. 29. It is a figure which shows the improvement object by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention.
  • the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are not satisfied. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio
  • the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are satisfied.
  • the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are not satisfied. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the condition where two or more radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination exist.
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 43. It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio
  • the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention it is a sequence of a handover operation when a handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination. It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration
  • the radio base station apparatus notifies the radio terminal apparatus of information about the cell and the neighboring cell that it forms, that is, the frequency of the radio signal and the ID (identification) of the neighboring cell.
  • the wireless terminal device detects and measures neighboring cells based on information notified from the wireless base station device.
  • the wireless terminal device starts moving to the neighboring cell based on the measurement result.
  • “movement” of the wireless terminal device means not only handover but also through which cell the wireless terminal device in an idle state starts communication in the future, that is, when a call or data communication is started. This means selecting whether to perform communication.
  • the destination of the wireless terminal device is determined by the wireless base station device or the higher-level device in the core network. For example, when the wireless terminal device is not communicating with the wireless base station device, the wireless terminal device determines the destination of the wireless terminal device.
  • handover means that a radio base station apparatus that is a communication partner of a radio terminal apparatus during a call or data communication is switched.
  • the wireless terminal device is located in a cell means that the wireless terminal device selects a wireless base station device forming the cell as a communication destination and can communicate with the wireless base station device. This means that communication is in progress.
  • a femto base station is a customer premises apparatus that connects a wireless terminal device connected via a wireless interface to a mobile communication carrier network using an IP backhaul.
  • the femto base station in the closed access mode provides a service only to related CSG (Closed Subscriber Group) members.
  • the hybrid mode femto base station also provides services to the associated CSG members and CSG non-members.
  • the femto base station in the open access mode operates as a normal base station.
  • Such a 3GPP definition may also be applied to the wireless communication system according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the macro base station and the pico base station are radio base station devices that are under the control of the operator and that can communicate with the radio base station device that has contracted with the operator. Further, it is considered that the macro base station and the pico base station are basically not turned off.
  • the femto base station is a radio base station apparatus that is mainly installed in an individual or corporate building and may move or be turned off depending on user circumstances.
  • the femto base station operates in an access mode of open / hybrid / closed.
  • the closed access mode only registered members (terminals) can be connected.
  • the service is provided only to registered members.
  • the hybrid mode the service is provided to both registered members and unregistered members, that is, non-members.
  • the open access mode the same operation as that of the macro base station and the pico base station is performed.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio communication system is a mobile communication system that complies with LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by, for example, 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project), and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • FIG. 1 two radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
  • Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B are, for example, femto base stations, pico base stations, or macro base stations.
  • the wireless base station device 101A can communicate with the wireless terminal device 202 by forming a cell CA and transmitting / receiving a wireless signal to / from the wireless terminal device 202 existing in the cell CA.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
  • the direction from the wireless terminal device to the core network is referred to as an uplink direction
  • the direction from the core network to the wireless terminal device is referred to as a downlink direction.
  • the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the radio communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention read and execute a program including each step of the following sequences from a memory (not shown).
  • This program can be installed externally.
  • the installed program is distributed in a state stored in a recording medium, for example.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S1).
  • the wireless base station device 101A sends a measurement start request (Measurement Configuration) to the wireless terminal device 202 to cause the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the set other wireless base station device.
  • This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S2).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the measurement start request from the wireless base station device 101A and starts the power measurement process (Measurement), that is, the wireless indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request.
  • the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the base station apparatus is measured (step S3).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (Measurement Report) indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A.
  • a measurement result notification (Measurement Report) indicating the measurement result of the received power
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S4).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S5).
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as a handover destination with reference to the information (step S6).
  • the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101B to the higher-level device (step S7).
  • the host apparatus receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S8).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level apparatus and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level apparatus (Step S9).
  • the higher-level device receives a handover response from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S10).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and transmits an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S11).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the higher-level device (step S12).
  • the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S13).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B ( Step S14).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S15).
  • the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S16).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases the information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S17).
  • a radio base station apparatus communicating with the radio terminal apparatus 202 or a handover source radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a serving base station, and a handover destination radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a neighboring base station.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • “Too Late HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, before handover starts or during handover processing, a radio link failure (RLF) occurs in the handover source radio base station apparatus, and a radio base station other than the handover source radio base station apparatus. This is a case where connection re-establishment of the wireless terminal device 202 to the device has occurred.
  • RLF radio link failure
  • the detection method of “Too Late HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the radio terminal device 202 reestablishes the radio link to the radio base station device 101B after causing the RLF for the radio base station device 101A, the radio base station device 101B notifies the radio base station device 101A of the RLF. Send. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101A detects “Too Late HO”.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from each radio base station apparatus, and wirelessly sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power. It transmits to base station apparatus 101A (step S51).
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S52).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an inter-base station interface (step S53).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S54).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 is out of service area of the cell CA, and Move to within the cell CB (step S55).
  • step S56 Due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202, the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (step S56) for instructing the handover transmitted from the wireless base station device 101A does not reach the wireless terminal device 202, and RLF is generated (step S56). S57).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • a connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S58).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment response to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S59). Thereby, an RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification (RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B (step S60).
  • RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete
  • This RRC connection re-establishment completion notification includes a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”, for example.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S61).
  • UE Information Request terminal information request
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101B, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101B (step S62).
  • the RLF report includes the PCI (Physical Cell ID) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection has been reestablished, and the own radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A
  • the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment occurrence are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B
  • the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101A ID.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101A by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the contents of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO” ( Step S63).
  • RLF INDICATION an RLF notification including the contents of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that “Too Late HO” has occurred to the cell CB by referring to the PCI, ECGI, and C-RNTI of the RLF notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B. (Step S64).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A executes a handover operation optimization process so as to suppress the occurrence of “Too Late HO” in the cell CB (step S65).
  • FIG. 5 and 6 are diagrams illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) has occurred in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • cell CB formed by radio base station apparatus 101B includes cell CB1 including the installation area of radio base station apparatus 101B, and radio base station apparatus 101B formed in cell CA.
  • the cell CB2 does not include an installation area.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • “Too Early HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and the wireless terminal device 202 is reconnected to the handover source wireless base station device. This is the case when establishment occurs.
  • the detection method of “Too Early HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report from the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A, the handover to the radio terminal apparatus 202 itself is performed within a predetermined time from the reception timing. When the terminal information release instruction upon completion of the transmission is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “Too Early HO”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. As a result, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “Too Early HO” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 moves into cell CB2 from a state where it is located in cell CA and is communicating with radio base station apparatus 101A (step S70). .
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the reception power of a radio signal transmitted from a radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the measured reception power to radio base station. It transmits to station apparatus 101A (Source eNB, Serving eNB) (step S71).
  • station apparatus 101A Source eNB, Serving eNB
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S72).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S73).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S74).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S75).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S76).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S77).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the stay time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S78).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S79).
  • step S80 the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S80).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves outside the cell CB and within the cell CA (step S81).
  • step S83 since the wireless terminal device 202 cannot communicate with the wireless base station device 101B, RLF occurs (step S83).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • a connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S84).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A since the radio base station apparatus 101A has released and does not hold the information (UE Context) regarding the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A can accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202. If it is not possible (step S85), an RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S86).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 when receiving the RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio terminal apparatus 202 starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S87).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101A (step S88).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S89).
  • RRC connection information RRC Connection Setup
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S90).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S91).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A (step S92).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S93).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A. (Step S94).
  • the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S95).
  • UE Information Request terminal information request
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101A (step S96).
  • the RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B
  • the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A
  • the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CA. "Is generated (step S97).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S98).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined not to be “Too Late HO” to the cell CA but to “Too Early HO” to the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CA It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “Too Early HO” to the cell CB (step S99), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S100).
  • This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “Too Early HO” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “Too Early HO” has occurred to the cell CB (step S101), and “Too Early HO”. A handover operation optimization process is executed so as to suppress the occurrence of (step S102).
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless communication system further includes a wireless base station device 101 ⁇ / b> C as compared with the wireless communication system illustrated in FIG. 1.
  • Radio base station apparatus 101C is, for example, a femto base station, a pico base station, or a macro base station.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • HO to Wong Cell refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and wireless communication is performed with respect to wireless base station devices other than the handover source and handover destination wireless base station devices. This is a case where the connection re-establishment of the terminal device 202 occurs.
  • the detection method of “HO to Wong Cell” is as follows. That is, when the radio base station apparatus 101B that is the handover destination receives the RLF report from the radio base station apparatus 101C other than the radio base station apparatus 101A that is the handover source, the radio terminal is traced back from the reception timing within a predetermined time. When the terminal information release instruction due to the completion of the handover of the apparatus 202 to itself is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “HO to Wong Cell”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. Thereby, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “HO to Wong Cell” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 when the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202 moves to the overlapping area of the virtual cell CBV and the cell CA ( Assume step S110).
  • the virtual cell CBV is a virtual cell expanded from the cell CB in accordance with the offset OST that is a parameter in order to promote handover from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the offset OST is a parameter held by the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power to radio base station. Transmit to the station apparatus 101A (step S111).
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S112).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S113).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S114).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S115).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S116).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S117).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the staying time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S118).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S119).
  • step S120 the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S120).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves out of the cell CB and into the virtual cell CBV and the cell CC (step S121).
  • the radio terminal device 202 has a large interference of radio signals transmitted from the radio base station device 101C (Other eNB), and cannot communicate with the radio base station device 101B, so that RLF occurs (step S123). .
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for nearby radio base station apparatuses by measuring the reception power of radio signals or the like. In this case, since the reception power of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101C is maximized, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection) in order to reconnect to the searched radio base station apparatus 101C. Reestablishment Request) is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S124).
  • RRC Connection RRC Connection
  • the wireless base station device 101C since the wireless base station device 101C does not hold information (UE Context) regarding the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101C cannot accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S125). ), RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S126).
  • UE Context information regarding the wireless terminal device 202
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S127).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101C (step S128).
  • the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S129).
  • RRC connection information RRC Connection Setup
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S130).
  • the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S131).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C (step S132).
  • the wireless base station device 101C transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S133).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C. (Step S134).
  • the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101C recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101C transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S135).
  • UE Information Request terminal information request
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives a terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including an RLF report to the wireless base station device 101C (step S136).
  • the RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B
  • the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101C
  • the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
  • the wireless base station device 101C recognizes that RLF has occurred in the wireless base station device 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the wireless terminal device 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CC. "Is generated (step S137).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S138).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined that it is not “Too Late HO” to the cell CC, and further, the RLF notification is received from the radio base station device 101C other than the radio base station device 101A. It is determined that it is not “Too Early HO” but “HO to Wron Cell” to the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B When the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CC It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “HO to Wong Cell” to the cell CB (step S139), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S140).
  • This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “HO to Wong Cell” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “HO to Wong Cell” has occurred to the cell CB (step S141), and performs “HO to Wong”.
  • the optimization process of the handover operation is executed so that the occurrence of “Cell” is suppressed (step S142).
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a reception quality simulation result of the wireless terminal device in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 shows an RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) of the wireless terminal device 202 for 100 seconds until the wireless terminal device 202 passes near the pico base station at a speed of 30 km per hour and passes near the macro base station.
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
  • graphs G1 and G3 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the macro base station
  • graphs G2 and G4 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the pico base station.
  • the graphs G1 and G2 take into account the temporal change in the received power of the radio signal in the radio terminal device 202 caused by shadowing, that is, the relative position change between the radio terminal device 202 and other objects. Simulation results, and graphs G3 and G4 are simulation results that do not consider shadowing.
  • the ideal position for handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the pico base station to the macro base station is the vicinity of the intersection of the graph, that is, the position where the movement time is about 17 seconds.
  • Y MRO (X)
  • Y is, for example, the occurrence frequency of “Too Late HO”, “Too Early HO” “Occurrence frequency”, “HO to Wong Cell” occurrence frequency, “Ping Pong HO” unnecessary handover occurrence frequency, etc.
  • the radio terminal device 202 connects to the radio base station device This is the frequency of occurrence of handover immediately after being performed.
  • X is a parameter for power measurement processing (Measurement), hysteresis HS: 0 dB to +15 dB, TTT (Time to Trigger): 0 ms to 5120 ms, or offset OST (Cell Individual Offset): ⁇ 24 dB to +24 dB It is.
  • X is a parameter for cell reselection processing.
  • hysteresis HS and TTT can be set for each event described later, and offset OST can be set for each serving cell formed by the serving base station and each neighboring cell.
  • the wireless base station device determines handover when receiving a measurement result notification (Measurement Report). That is, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification corresponds to the handover timing.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an event A1 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the horizontal axis is time
  • the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202
  • the SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, that is, the reception power of the radio signal transmitted by the serving base station or SINR.
  • hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T1).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T2).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T3).
  • timing T4 the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T4).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 performs a power measurement process periodically, for example, regardless of the transition between the report-on state and the report-off state, and transmits the latest measurement result as a measurement result notification. Further, for example, radio terminal apparatus 202 performs transition between the report-on state and the report-off state independently for each of received power and SINR. That is, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification if a condition is satisfied for one of the received power and SINR.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T11).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T11 in a state where the condition that the received power or SINR is smaller than (Th + HS) is satisfied (timing T12).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T13).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T14).
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an event A3 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the horizontal axis is time
  • the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202
  • SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell
  • NBC is the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, that is, This is the reception power or SINR of a radio signal transmitted by a neighboring base station.
  • offset OST1 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, and hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions. Also, the offset OST2 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report-on state when ⁇ (reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST2 ⁇ becomes larger than ⁇ (reception power or SINR of the serving cell) + OST1 + HS ⁇ (timing T21).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 performs the processing from the timing T21 to the TTT in a state where ⁇ (neighboring cell received power or SINR) + OST2 ⁇ is larger than ⁇ (serving cell received power or SINR) + OST1-HS ⁇ .
  • a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T22).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T23).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T24).
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an event A4 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells, and the hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to the threshold Th.
  • Wireless terminal apparatus 202 transitions to a report-on state when ⁇ (reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST ⁇ is greater than (Th + HS) (timing T31).
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T31 while the condition that ⁇ (reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST ⁇ is larger than (Th ⁇ HS) is satisfied. (Timing T32).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T33).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T34).
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an event A5 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, and the hysteresis HS1 is set in the positive and negative direction with respect to the threshold Th1.
  • Hysteresis HS2 is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to Th2.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state. (Timing T41).
  • Radio terminal 202 satisfies the condition that the reception power or SINR of the serving cell is smaller than (Th1 + HS1) and ⁇ (reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST ⁇ is larger than (Th2-HS2).
  • TTT elapses from timing T41 in a state where it is in a state, a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T42).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T43).
  • the timing of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 can be controlled by adjusting the parameters described in the events A1 to A5, that is, the hysteresis HS, TTT, and the offset OST.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the hysteresis HS in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 shows the case of event A3.
  • hysteresis HS when hysteresis HS is set to zero, a transition is made to the report on state at timing T51, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T53, and a transition to the report off state is made at timing T55.
  • the state transits to the report-on state at timing T52 after timing T51, the measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T54 after timing T53, and timing T55. At a later timing T56, the state transits to the report off state.
  • the transmission timing of the measurement result notification that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing timing control of the handover operation by adjusting the TTT in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 shows the case of event A3.
  • the transmission timing of the measurement result notification that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 shows the case of event A3.
  • the transmission timing of the measurement result notification that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed. Further, the transition from the report off state to the report on state is delayed, and the transition from the report on state to the report off state is accelerated.
  • the timing of the handover operation is delayed by increasing the hysteresis HS, increasing the TTT, or decreasing the offset OST. That is, since the time for which the wireless terminal device 202 is connected to the serving base station becomes longer, the occurrence frequency of “Too Early HO”, “HO to Wong Cell” and “Ping Pong HO” is reduced, and “Too Late HO” The frequency of occurrence will increase.
  • the handover timing can be adjusted by adjusting any of the parameters, but these effects differ depending on the topography including interference, the moving speed of the wireless terminal device, and the like.
  • Adjusting the hysteresis HS and the offset OST corresponds to adjusting the position where the handover is performed by virtually increasing or decreasing the cell. For example, by increasing the hysteresis HS of the serving cell, the received power of the radio signal is increased and the handover to another cell is difficult to be performed. Also, by setting the offset OST of the neighboring cell to a negative value, the received power of the radio signal from the neighboring cell appears to be small, and handover to another cell is difficult to be performed.
  • the hysteresis HS and the offset OST are parameters that are not easily influenced by the moving speed of the wireless terminal device.
  • an offset OST is set for each neighboring cell, and the event At least one of A1 to A5 is set, and hysteresis HS and TTT corresponding to the set event are set.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 includes an antenna 91, a circulator 92, a radio reception unit 93, a radio transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control unit 98.
  • the signal processing unit 95 includes a reception signal processing unit 96 and a transmission signal processing unit 97.
  • the signal processing unit 95 and the control unit 98 are realized by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
  • the circulator 92 outputs the radio signal from the radio terminal device 202 received by the antenna 91 to the radio reception unit 93 and outputs the radio signal received from the radio transmission unit 94 to the antenna 91.
  • the radio reception unit 93 converts the frequency of the radio signal received from the circulator 92 into a baseband signal or IF (Intermediate Frequency) signal, converts the frequency-converted signal into a digital signal, and outputs the digital signal to the reception signal processing unit 96.
  • IF Intermediate Frequency
  • the reception signal processing unit 96 performs signal processing such as despreading in the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the digital signal received from the wireless reception unit 93, and performs part or all of the digital signal after this signal processing.
  • the data is converted into a predetermined frame format and transmitted to the core network side.
  • the transmission signal processing unit 97 uses IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) in the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for communication data obtained by converting communication data received from the core network side into a predetermined frame format or communication data generated by itself.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex
  • the wireless transmission unit 94 converts the digital signal received from the transmission signal processing unit 97 into an analog signal, converts the frequency of the converted analog signal into a wireless signal, and outputs the converted signal to the circulator 92.
  • the control unit 98 exchanges various types of information with each unit and the core network in the radio base station apparatus 101.
  • the radio base station apparatus optimizes the handover operation by adjusting parameters such as hysteresis HS, offset OST, and TTT as described above.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • a preparation process on the core network side that is, the wireless base station device 101A
  • the wireless base station device 101A Consider a preparation period T101 until various information is exchanged between the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and then the radio base station apparatus 101A performs a process of transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • “Too Late HO” may occur.
  • the preparation process on the core network side information is often transmitted and received via a general communication line. Therefore, it takes a long time to complete the preparation process, and the preparation period T101 is significantly increased. there is a possibility.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • control unit 98 includes a handover request unit 11, a handover instruction unit 12, a handover condition adjustment unit 13, a handover information acquisition unit 14, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15.
  • the terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15 acquires the measurement result notification from the wireless terminal device 202, obtains the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 from the acquired measurement result notification, and determines the communication quality.
  • the handover request unit 11 and the handover instruction unit 12 are notified.
  • the handover request unit 11 makes a request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device 202 from its own radio base station device 101 to another radio base station device to other radio base station devices, that is, makes a handover request to other radio base station devices. Transmit to the radio base station apparatus. For example, the handover request unit 11 makes the request to another radio base station apparatus when a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. That is, an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 receives the above response, and when the handover execution condition regarding the communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is not satisfied, Cancel or suspend giving instructions. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instructing unit 12 does not give the above instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and notifies other wireless base station devices to stop the handover operation. To do.
  • the components surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 20, that is, the handover condition adjusting unit 13, the handover information acquiring unit 14, and the terminal measurement result acquiring unit 15 are not essential components in the present invention. Even if the radio base station apparatus 101 does not include these components, it is possible to achieve the object of the present invention to stabilize communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus. .
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S161).
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 a measurement start request for causing the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the other wireless base station device that has been set.
  • This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S162).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives the measurement start request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and starts power measurement processing, that is, the radio base station apparatus indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request.
  • the received power of the radio signal transmitted from is measured (step S163).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S164).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S165).
  • the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S166).
  • the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101B to the higher-level device (step S167).
  • the host device receives the handover request from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station device 101B (step S168).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level apparatus and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level apparatus (Step S169).
  • the host device receives the handover response from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S170).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S171).
  • the wireless base station device 101A based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S172).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus and the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (Step S173).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S174).
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the higher-level device (step S175).
  • the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S176).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S177).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S178).
  • the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S179).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S180).
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 22 is the same as FIG.
  • steps S191 to S202 are the same as the operations in steps S161 to S172 shown in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus, and executes the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 when the finally acquired communication quality does not satisfy the predetermined handover execution condition. It is determined that the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed should be stopped (step S203).
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S204).
  • the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is set as a condition. Notify the upper apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B that it is not satisfied.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and transmits the flag to the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B. To do.
  • the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting regarding the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing such as new parameter setting processing from occurring in the higher-level device and the radio base station device 101B, and to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
  • the host apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary, and the radio base station apparatus
  • the handover stop notification is transmitted to 101B (step S205).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S206).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the conditional expression of event A3 to Set the preparation conditions. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines execution of the handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. (Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS) ⁇ (received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 of neighboring cell)
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines the start of preparation for handover operation when the following expression is satisfied.
  • the control value P is a value of zero or more.
  • the handover preparation condition is a condition where it is less necessary to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202 as compared with the handover execution condition.
  • the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the higher-level apparatus is deteriorated by the amount corresponding to the control value P or more compared with the time when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. In this case, it is determined that a handover operation should be executed.
  • the preparatory process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the criterion for determining whether to execute the handover operation. It becomes possible to quickly execute a handover operation in response to an environmental change.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover operation when the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the host apparatus is better than when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. It is determined that should be stopped. That is, when the control value P is set to zero, the handover operation that is no longer necessary due to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be appropriately stopped.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 13 can adjust the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
  • the handover information acquisition unit 14 acquires the number of times that the handover instruction unit 12 has notified the cancellation of the handover operation to another radio base station apparatus. Then, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 14.
  • the handover information acquisition unit 14 acquires the number of times that the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device 202 is inappropriate. Then, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 14.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the control value P according to the following equation.
  • W1 and W2 are weighting coefficients, and are a positive value and a negative value, respectively.
  • P W1 ⁇ “Too Late HO” number of times + W2 ⁇ number of times of useless preparation processing (number of times of handover operation cancellation)
  • the number of times described above is not limited to the number of times for one other wireless base station device in a certain wireless base station device, but may be the total number of times for a plurality of other wireless base station devices.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may use, for example, the value of the CQI report as the communication quality.
  • the CQI report does not directly notify the current radio wave condition in each cell, but is a value expressed in 16 levels from 0 to 15 by the following formula using SINR.
  • CQI min (max (round ((SINR [dB] +8) /1.892), 0), 15)
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to wait until the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition after receiving a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request. That is, in radio base station apparatus 101, handover instruction unit 12 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus and waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied when the handover execution condition is not satisfied. Then, when the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 12 gives a handover operation instruction to the wireless terminal device 202. On the other hand, if a predetermined handover suspension condition related to communication quality is satisfied before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 12 does not give a handover operation instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and performs the handover operation. Notify other radio base station apparatus to cancel.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on a measurement result notification that arrives periodically, for example, from the radio terminal apparatus 202 after completion of the handover operation preparation process.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to perform a handover operation.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The case assumed in FIG. 23 is the same as that in FIG.
  • steps S211 to S220 are the same as the operations in steps S161 to S170 shown in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S221).
  • the wireless base station device 101A based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S222).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and waits until the communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition or handover cancellation condition (step S223).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S224).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S225).
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 24 is the same as that in FIG.
  • steps S241 to S253 are the same as the operations in steps S211 to S223 shown in FIG. 23, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, and cancel the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be (step S254).
  • the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S255).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and sends it to the host apparatus. Send.
  • the higher-level apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary.
  • the handover cancellation notification is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101B (step S256).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S257).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 sets a handover cancellation condition using the conditional expression of event A3. To do. That is, in addition to the conditional expressions for determining whether to perform handover operation and determining whether to start preparation described with reference to the sequences illustrated in FIGS. 22 and 23, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines to cancel handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. .
  • the control value Q is a positive value.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation should be stopped when the communication quality is improved by an amount corresponding to the control value Q or more compared to when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. That is, when the control value Q is set to a positive value, the handover operation can be appropriately stopped with respect to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202.
  • control value Q when the control value Q is set to zero, the handover preparation condition and the handover cancellation condition become equal, and the handover preparation process and the cancellation process are repeated. However, by setting the control value Q to a positive value, The occurrence of such an event can be prevented.
  • the handover cancel condition is not limited to a condition related to communication quality, and may be an elapsed time, for example.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts a timer before and after transmitting a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the higher-level apparatus (step S247). To do. Then, when the timer started before the handover execution condition expires, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, and cancels the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be, and a handover stop notification is transmitted to the host device (step S254).
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a breakdown of time required for the handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the time required for the handover operation is, for example, a time T111 corresponding to an interval of power measurement processing in radio terminal apparatus 202, a time T112 corresponding to TTT, a preparation processing time T113 for handover operation, and a handover This is the sum of the operation execution time, that is, the time T114 from when the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
  • TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T111 and time T112 may overlap.
  • FIG. 25 shows a case where the handover operation is performed based on the measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after the transition to the report-on state, in order to simplify the description.
  • the time T111 is, for example, 200 ms, and 5 ms when using the CQI report.
  • the time T112 is, for example, 0 ms to 2000 ms.
  • the time T113 is, for example, 50 ms to 150 ms.
  • the time T114 is 40 ms, for example.
  • the time T111 and the time T112 can be shortened by adjusting parameters such as the hysteresis HS, the offset OST, and the TTT.
  • time T113 is ideally reduced to 0 ms by the configuration for performing the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation execution determination process as described above. Is possible.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 By the way, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication disconnection and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system.
  • the handover request unit 11 performs handover of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus.
  • a request for operation is made to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. give.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives the above response and the predetermined handover execution condition regarding the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is not satisfied, Cancel or hold the above instructions.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation, so that “Too Late HO” can be suppressed.
  • “Too Late HO” can be suppressed.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives the response and performs a predetermined communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is not instructed to perform the handover operation, and notifies the other wireless base station device that the handover operation is to be stopped.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives the above response from another radio base station apparatus and receives its own radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202. If a predetermined handover execution condition regarding the communication quality is not satisfied, the system waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied. Then, the handover instruction unit 12 gives a handover instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 when the handover execution condition is satisfied.
  • the handover operation is performed on the radio terminal apparatus 202. Since an instruction can be given, a handover operation can be executed at an optimal timing.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied, and before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover stop condition regarding the communication quality is set. When the condition is satisfied, a handover instruction is not given to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the other radio base station apparatus is notified that the handover operation is to be stopped.
  • the handover request unit 11 satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition relating to communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202. In this case, a handover request is made to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
  • the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
  • the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equal to or better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition, and the handover is canceled.
  • the communication quality indicated by the condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 when the handover instruction unit 12 notifies other radio base station apparatuses of the cancellation of the handover operation, the handover instruction unit 12 and the radio base station apparatus 101 The other radio base station apparatus is notified that the communication quality between the terminal apparatuses 202 does not satisfy the condition.
  • the other radio base station apparatus can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting related to the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent occurrence of unnecessary processes such as new parameter setting processes in other radio base station apparatuses and appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
  • the handover condition adjustment unit 13 adjusts the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
  • Such a configuration makes it possible to adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of canceling handover operations, thereby realizing more appropriate handover operations.
  • the handover condition adjustment unit 13 is based on the number of times that the handover instruction unit 12 notifies the other radio base station apparatus of the cancellation of the handover operation. Adjust the communication quality difference.
  • Such a configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of cancellation of handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of handover operation cancellation.
  • the handover information acquisition unit 14 performs the handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202. Get the number of times it was inappropriate. Then, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 14.
  • the communication quality between radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202 the relationship between the reception power of the serving cell and the reception power of neighboring cells, or the CQI
  • the configuration uses report values
  • the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to the received power of the wireless terminal device 202, and any configuration that uses some index indicating communication quality between the wireless base station device and the wireless terminal device, such as an error rate of a pilot signal, may be used. Moreover, the structure using the conditional expression of events other than event A3 may be sufficient. Further, the communication quality is not limited to the downlink communication quality, and may be configured to use the uplink communication quality.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing radio environment parameters in the radio communication system to be simulated.
  • the radio environment parameters of the radio communication system to be the target of this simulation are “number of base stations / number of sectors”, “distance between base stations”, “path loss”, that is, radio transmitted by the radio base station apparatus.
  • the number of macro base stations in this wireless communication system is 19, the total number of sectors is 57, assuming that the macro base station has three sectors, the number of pico base stations is 1, and the pico base station Has one sector and the total number of sectors is one.
  • the distance between the macro base stations is 500 m, and the distance between the macro base station and the pico base station is 250 m.
  • the path loss for the macro base station is 15.3 + 37.6 ⁇ log 10 (d) [dB] where the distance between the macro base station and the wireless terminal device is d [m], and the path loss for the pico base station is pico
  • the distance between the base station and the wireless terminal device is 30.6 + 36.7 ⁇ log 10 (d) [dB] where d [m] is the distance.
  • the antenna gain of the macro base station is 15 dBi, and the antenna gain of the pico base station is 5 dBi.
  • the antenna gain of the wireless terminal device 202 is 0 dBi in both the macro base station and the pico base station.
  • the standard deviation of shadowing for the macro base station is 8 dB, and the standard deviation of shadowing for the pico base station is 10 dB.
  • the shadowing interphase distance for the macro base station is 25 m, and the shadowing interphase distance for the pico base station is 25 m.
  • the shadowing correlation value for a macro base station is 0.5 between cells and 1 between sectors, and the shadowing correlation value for a pico base station is 0.5 between cells.
  • the directivity pattern of the macro base station antenna is a three-dimensional pattern, and the pico base station antenna is omnidirectional.
  • the carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the macro base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively, and the carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the pico base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively.
  • the total transmission power of the macro base station is 46 dBm, and the total transmission power of the pico base station is 30 dBm.
  • the macro base station has one transmission antenna, the pico base station has one transmission antenna, and the wireless terminal device 202 has two reception antennas. Other parameters such as the minimum distance between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus conform to 3GPP TR 36.814.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating parameters of power measurement processing (Measurement) in the wireless communication system to be simulated.
  • set 1 to set 5 are provided as profiles. In the order from set 1 to set 5, the timing of the handover operation is advanced, and in set 5, the timing of the handover operation is the earliest.
  • the parameters of the power measurement process are the terminal moving speed, the base station load factor, TTT, the offset OST of the event A3, the power measurement interval, that is, the measurement result notification update cycle, and the filtering coefficient ⁇ .
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the received power M (t ⁇ 1) measured at time (t ⁇ 1), the received power M (t) measured at time t after time (t ⁇ 1), and the filtering coefficient ⁇ . From this, the received power MR (t) expressed by the following equation is calculated.
  • MR (t) (1-2 ⁇ ⁇ / 4 ) ⁇ MR (t ⁇ 1) + 2 ⁇ ⁇ / 4 ⁇ M (t)
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the received power MR (t) to the wireless base station device.
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ When the filtering coefficient ⁇ is increased, the past received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so the timing of the handover operation is delayed. On the other hand, when the filtering coefficient ⁇ is reduced, the more recent received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so that the timing of the handover operation is advanced.
  • the moving speed of the wireless terminal device 202 is 3 km, 30 km, 60 km, and 120 km per hour, and the base station load factor is 100%.
  • the TTT is 480 ms
  • the offset OST is 3 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 4.
  • the TTT is 160 ms
  • the offset OST is 3 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 4.
  • the TTT is 160 ms
  • the offset OST is 2 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 1.
  • TTT is 80 ms
  • the offset OST is 1 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 1.
  • TTT is 40 ms
  • offset OST is ⁇ 1 dB
  • power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • filtering coefficient ⁇ is 0.
  • HO preparation shortening an operation for completing the handover operation preparation process prior to the handover operation execution determination is referred to as “HO preparation shortening”.
  • the radio base station apparatus selects the radio base station apparatus with the highest received power as the handover destination in the newest measurement result notification. Further, the radio base station apparatus receives a measurement result notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 once every 200 ms.
  • the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is performed is 10 ms
  • the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is not performed is as shown in FIG. 2 without using the X2 interface. Assuming a handover operation using the S1 interface, it is 100 ms.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a simulation result of a handover failure probability.
  • the probability of occurrence of handover failure can be reduced in most cases compared to the configuration in which HO preparation shortening is not performed.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a simulation result of the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO”.
  • the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is slightly increased as compared with the configuration in which the HO preparation is not shortened. This is because handover failure (HOF) is avoided.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 28 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG.
  • the sum of the handover failure probability and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is decreased in most cases as compared with the configuration in which the HO preparation shortening is not performed.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an improvement target by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 shows a breakdown of the elapsed time from when the radio wave environment in the surrounding cells becomes better than that in the serving cell until the handover operation is actually completed.
  • the time required for the handover operation is, for example, a time T211 corresponding to an interval of power measurement processing in the wireless terminal device 202, a time T212 corresponding to TTT, a preparation time T213 for handover operation, and an execution time of the handover operation, that is, RRC This is the sum of the time T214 from when the connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
  • TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T211 and time T212 may overlap.
  • FIG. 31 shows a case where a handover operation is performed based on a measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after transition to the report-on state.
  • the time T211 is, for example, 200 ms, and is 5 ms at the shortest when the CQI report is used.
  • the time T212 is 40 ms to 1000 ms, for example.
  • the time T213 is, for example, 40 ms to 100 ms.
  • the time T214 is 50 ms, for example.
  • the improvement target by “HO preparation shortening” in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention is time T213.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation is performed after the execution of the handover operation is determined. For this reason, even if the HO preparation is shortened, the effect of reducing the occurrence of “Ping Pong HO”, that is, reducing the number of unnecessary handover operations is not directly obtained.
  • the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus is appropriately controlled by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and the communication in the radio communication system can be stabilized. Was confirmed.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • a radio communication system 401 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A
  • a handover operation is performed in which the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B corresponds to a peripheral base station (also referred to as a target base station).
  • FIG. 32 representatively shows two radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
  • the wireless communication system 401 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control device), and a P-GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GW 161 gateway device
  • MMEs 162A and 162B communication control device
  • P-GW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • the wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet.
  • Communication data including
  • the S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and also received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302.
  • the transmitted communication data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B.
  • the MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401.
  • the MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 401.
  • the MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B transmit and receive communication data to and from IP network 302 via S-GW 161 and P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines. .
  • the MMEs 162A, 162B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 33 is a sequence of handover operations in a situation where the execution conditions for handover operations are satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to wireless base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S321).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S322).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A that is a corresponding higher-level apparatus (step S323).
  • the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its management target (step S324).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S325).
  • the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A.
  • the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different.
  • the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302 are the same. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S326).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S327).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (Step S328).
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S329).
  • the target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period for the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or the target packet is newly received from the S-GW 161.
  • data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the MME 162A when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S330).
  • a logical path hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path
  • the S-GW 161 upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S331).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S332).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S333). Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S334).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S335).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S336).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S337).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S338).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S339).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S340).
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request to the S-GW 161.
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S341).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S342).
  • the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S343).
  • the S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switch response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S344).
  • the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S345).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S346).
  • the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S347).
  • the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S348).
  • FIG. 34 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S351 to step S362 is the same as the operation from step S321 to step S332 shown in FIG. 33, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S363).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancel notification for canceling the handover operation to the MME 162A (step S364).
  • the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S365).
  • the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S366).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S367).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S368).
  • the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S369).
  • the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S370).
  • the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S371).
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 402 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. 32, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station A station apparatus 101B.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to 101B.
  • the wireless communication system 402 further includes S-GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), an MME 162 (communication control device), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GWs 161A and 161B gateway devices
  • MME 162 communication control device
  • P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • the S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
  • the S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 402.
  • the MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the MME 162 exchange various data with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
  • the MME 162 and the S-GWs 161A and 161B exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface, which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 36 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S381 to step S383 is the same as the operation from step S321 to step S323 shown in FIG. 33, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its own management target. Here, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is the management target of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S384).
  • the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different (step S385).
  • the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the upper network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the upper network can pass through the S-GW 161B.
  • the S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path with the 101B (step S386).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S387).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S388).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S389).
  • the MME 162 when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path).
  • the data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S390).
  • the S-GW 161B upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S391).
  • the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S392).
  • the S-GW 161A upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S393).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the base transceiver station 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S394).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S395).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S396).
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a state notification indicating its own communication state and the like to the MME 162 (step S397).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S398).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S399).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S400).
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
  • the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S401).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (step S402).
  • the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S403).
  • the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S404).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S405).
  • the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S406).
  • the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S407).
  • the S-GW 161A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. Transmit (step S408).
  • the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S409).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S410).
  • FIG. 37 is a sequence of handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S411 to step S424 is the same as the operation from step S381 to step S394 shown in FIG. 36, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S425).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S426).
  • the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S427).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S428).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S429).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S430).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S431).
  • step S432 to step S435 are executed. Since the operations from step S432 to step S435 are the same as the operations from step S407 to step S410 shown in FIG. 36, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 403 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by, for example, 3GPP, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. A station apparatus 101B.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state in which it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to the apparatus 101B.
  • the wireless communication system 403 further includes S-GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control devices), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GWs 161A and 161B gateway devices
  • MMEs 162A and 162B communication control devices
  • P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the MME 162B exchange various kinds of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • the MME 162A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 39 is a sequence of handover operations in a situation where the execution conditions for handover operations are satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S441 to step S445 is the same as the operation from step S321 to step S325 shown in FIG. 33, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different (step S446).
  • the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the higher level network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the higher level network can pass through the S-GW 161B. A request is made to the S-GW 161B to create a communication path between them (step S447).
  • the S-GW 161B receives a communication path creation request from the MME 162B, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162B. (Step S448).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S449).
  • radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from MME 162B, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to MME 162B (step S450).
  • the MME 162B when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path).
  • the data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S451).
  • the S-GW 161B upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162B, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162B (step S452).
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S453).
  • the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a logical communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S454).
  • the S-GW 161A upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S455).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S456).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S457).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S458).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S459).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S460).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S461).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S462).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S463).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S464).
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S465).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S466).
  • the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the above path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S467).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs a path, that is, a logical communication path switching process, that is, sets the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101A To the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S468).
  • the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162A requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S469).
  • the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S470).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S471).
  • the S-GW 161A receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162A, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162A ( Step S472).
  • the MME 162A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S473).
  • the S-GW 161A deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A. Transmit (step S474).
  • the MME 162B deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S475).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162B (step S476).
  • FIG. 40 is a sequence of handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S481 to step S496 is the same as the operation from step S441 to step S456 shown in FIG. 39, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S497).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162A (step S498).
  • the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S499).
  • the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S500).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S501).
  • the MME 162B requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S502).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162B, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162B ( Step S503).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S504).
  • the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S505).
  • step S506 to step S509 are executed. Since the operations from step S506 to step S509 are the same as the operations from step S473 to step S476 shown in FIG. 39, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the wireless communication system.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B. It transmits to corresponding MME162A. Further, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the MME 162A, the MME 162A transmits the handover request to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B. In addition, the MME 162B transmits the received handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a response to the MME 162A.
  • the MME 162A receives the response from the MME 162B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, The provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation is completed prior to determining whether to perform the handover operation. Therefore, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike when adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied.
  • the communication quality transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101B and indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the MME 162 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162.
  • the MME 162 is configured when the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network. Transmits a communication path creation request to the S-GW 161B.
  • the S-GW 161B can relay communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 transmitted from the upper network and communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device 202 to the upper network.
  • a route is created, and a communication route creation response to the communication route creation request is transmitted to the MME 162.
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied. In this case, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
  • the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of the handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late. it can.
  • the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied. Is transmitted to the MME 162, and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the S-GW 161 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates
  • FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a sequence of handover operations in the situation shown in FIG. is there.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A can communicate with radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming cell CA and transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in cell CA. It is.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • This measurement result includes the measurement results of the received power of the radio signals transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells and the cell IDs of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C (step S511).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover preparation process should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
  • the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, as a handover destination radio base station apparatus, that the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is better among the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C that are candidates for the handover destination. Select (step S512).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A when the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected as a handover destination in step S512, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 that is a higher-level apparatus. Transmit (step S513).
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S514).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME (step S515).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S516). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation is completed (step S517).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S518).
  • the wireless base station device 101A based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition (step S519).
  • step S520 to step S526 are executed. Since the operations from step S520 to step S526 are the same as the operations from step S174 to step S180 shown in FIG. 21, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a problem in an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates, and FIG. 44 shows an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 43.
  • FIG. 44 shows an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 43.
  • step S531 to step S538 are executed. Since the operations from step S531 to step S538 are the same as the operations from step S511 to step S518 shown in FIG. 42, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 has entered the cell CC, and the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202 newly acquired by the wireless base station device 101A satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Suppose that it does not meet.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the radio base station apparatus 101B should be stopped (step S539).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification for canceling the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S540). Then, the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S541).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S542). Then, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S543).
  • the wireless base station device 101A selects a handover destination wireless base station device based on the newly acquired measurement result.
  • the wireless base station device 101C is newly selected as a handover destination wireless base station device (step S544).
  • a handover operation preparation process (steps S545 to S549) is performed again. Since the operations from step S545 to step S549 are the same as the operations from step S513 to step S517 shown in FIG. 42, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. In such a case, the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation stop process are repeated.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA and selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, cell CA. It is assumed that the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C satisfy the preparation conditions for the handover operation in a situation where the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have moved to the overlapping area of the cell CB and the cell CC.
  • FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 404 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A. , 101B, 101C. In FIG. 45, three radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
  • the wireless communication system 404 further includes an S-GW (Serving Gateway) 161 (gateway device), an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 (communication control device) provided in the core network 301, and a P-GW (Packet Data Network). Gateway) 163.
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • P-GW Packet Data Network
  • the wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. Send and receive communication data.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163.
  • the communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
  • the MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 401.
  • the MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C transmit and receive communication data to and from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
  • the MME 162 and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of the radio communication system 404 are all the same as the radio base station apparatus 101 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. That is, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C include an antenna 91, a circulator 92, a radio reception unit 93, a radio transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control. Part 98.
  • control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 11, a handover instruction unit 12, a handover condition adjustment unit 13, a handover information acquisition unit 14, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15.
  • the handover request unit 11 transmits a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses. For example, the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that both the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have a handover preparation condition between the radio terminal apparatus 202 and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. A handover request is transmitted to.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, and selects a handover destination radio base station apparatus from among the other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response.
  • the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 of the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates, and selects the handover destination radio base station from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Select a station device.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 acquires the measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on the measurement result, the radio terminal device The radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing a handover operation to the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 receives the response and executes handover related to the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202. If the condition is not satisfied, the assignment of the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 12 does not transmit an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a handover cancellation notification to another radio base station apparatus. Send.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 can exclude other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the measurement results that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates. is there.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves to a position away from the radio base station device 101C to such an extent that the received power with the radio base station device 101C cannot be measured.
  • the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202 within a predetermined period after the wireless base station device 101A receives the response indicates the communication state between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202.
  • information related to the measurement result of the received power is included, information related to the measurement result of the received power indicating the communication state between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may not be included. In such a case, the handover instructing unit 12 can remove the radio base station apparatus 101C from the handover destination candidates.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 notifies the other base transceiver station other than the handover destination base transceiver station among the other base transceiver stations corresponding to the response to stop the handover operation. Send.
  • the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • a case is assumed where a response indicating that there is a transmission and the handover instruction unit 12 selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives, for example, a notification indicating that the handover is completed from the radio base station apparatus 101B via the higher-level apparatus, the handover instruction unit 12 of the radio base station apparatus 101A A handover operation stop notification is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101C.
  • FIG. 46 is a sequence of the handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • This measurement result notification includes the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells (step S551).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
  • the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S552).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S553). Also, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101C to the MME 162 (step S554).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S555). Further, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S556).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S557). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (Step S558).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S559). Also, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101C as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S560). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S561).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S562).
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In 3rd Embodiment, the case where the wireless base station apparatus 101B is selected is assumed (step S563).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S564).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S565).
  • the MME 162 receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A, and transmits a status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S566).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S567).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S568).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S569).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and performs a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C.
  • a handover cancel notification for canceling is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S570).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S571).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S572).
  • the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S573).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S574).
  • the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed (step S568), and after the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162 (step S569), the radio base station The apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S570).
  • the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to.
  • the operations from step S570 to step S573 are performed before step S567.
  • the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C sends a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station devices. Do it.
  • the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent the communication between the device 202 and the radio base station device from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives a handover response, and receives a handover destination radio from other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response.
  • a base station apparatus is selected, and an instruction to perform a handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus is given to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the information is compared with the case where a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction.
  • the amount can be reduced, and the contents of the instruction can be simplified.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 transmits a radio signal transmitted from another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response.
  • a measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 is acquired, and a handover destination radio base station device is selected based on the measurement result.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives another radio base station apparatus corresponding to a measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period after receiving the handover response as the handover destination. Remove from the candidate.
  • a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus 202 cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates.
  • a suitable radio base station apparatus can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 performs handover target radio base station among other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the handover response after the handover operation is completed.
  • a request for canceling the handover operation is transmitted to a radio base station apparatus other than the station apparatus.
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 may When moving in a direction approaching the apparatus, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 in the wireless communication system 404 performs the handover operation to the wireless base station device other than the wireless base station device selected as the handover destination as described above. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device 202 moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need to do it.
  • radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 405 include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio receiver 93, and radio A transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control unit 98 are provided.
  • control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 11, a handover instruction unit 12, a handover condition adjustment unit 13, a handover information acquisition unit 14, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15. including.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, sets another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response as a handover destination candidate, and indicates the radio base station apparatus that is the candidate Information is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 of the radio base station apparatus 101A instructs the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C to perform a handover operation using the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the message structure of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction
  • FIG. 48 is transmitted from the handover request unit in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration instruction
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A when the radio base station apparatus 101A selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A Includes only the information of the radio base station apparatus 101B in the “Mobility Control Info” of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (see “Info1” in FIG. 47).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs “Mobility Control Info” in an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction.
  • the information (“Target Cell List”) of a plurality of radio base station devices is enumerated and transmitted to the radio terminal device 202 (see “Info2” in FIG. 48).
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 can grasp
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction and selects a handover destination wireless base station device.
  • the handover instructing unit 12 receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 and sends a status notification indicating the communication state of its own radio base station apparatus to the handover destination radio base station apparatus Send to.
  • FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a wireless terminal apparatus of the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless communication system 405 includes an antenna 21, a circulator 22, a receiving unit 23, a transmitting unit 24, and a signal processing unit 25.
  • the signal processing unit 25 includes a reception signal processing unit 26, a selection unit 27, and a communication control unit 28.
  • the circulator 22 outputs the radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C received at the antenna 21 to the reception unit 23 and outputs the radio signals received from the transmission unit 24 to the antenna 21.
  • the receiving unit 23 outputs the radio signal received from the circulator 22 to the signal processing unit 25.
  • the received signal processing unit 26 performs various signal processing such as despreading in a CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the radio signal output from the receiving unit 23.
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • the selection unit 27 determines whether the radio base station apparatus is a handover destination candidate. To select a handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the selection unit 27 of the wireless terminal device 202 acquires a measurement result of the received power in the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless signal transmitted from the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on the measurement result Then, the radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the communication control unit 28 uses, for example, an IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) in an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the selection unit 27 or information generated by itself. Various signal processing is performed, and the signal after this signal processing is output to the transmitter 24.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex
  • the transmission unit 24 outputs the signal received from the communication control unit 28 to the circulator 22.
  • the transmission unit 24 transmits information indicating the handover destination radio base station device selected by the selection unit 27, that is, a handover destination notification via the circulator 22 and the antenna 21, as a wireless connection destination of the radio terminal device 202. Transmit to base station apparatus 101A.
  • FIG. 50 is a sequence of the handover operation when the radio terminal apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S581 to step S592 are executed. Since the operations from step S581 to step S592 are the same as the operations from step S551 to step S562 shown in FIG. 46, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless base station device 101A based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition (step S593).
  • radio base station apparatus 101A issues an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to instruct radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation to radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C determined as a handover destination candidate based on the measurement result notification. It transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S594).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and the handover operation preparation process is completed.
  • a handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected from the existing radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. In the third embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S595).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits information indicating the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, a handover destination notification to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S596).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a status notification indicating the communication status of the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162. Send.
  • This state notification includes, for example, information indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination (step S597).
  • step S598 to step S606 are executed. Since the operations from step S598 to step S606 are the same as the operations from step S566 to step S574 shown in FIG. 46, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives the handover response, and designates another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response as a handover destination candidate. Is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the configuration in which the wireless terminal device 202 selects the handover destination wireless base station device makes it possible to select the handover destination wireless base station according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source wireless base station device selects.
  • a device can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit 12 receives and receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 Predetermined information is transmitted to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the information.
  • the handover source radio base station apparatus grasps the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits information necessary for the handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. Since it is transmitted to the apparatus, it is possible to transmit and receive information without waste.
  • ⁇ Fourth embodiment> In the first embodiment described above, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described.
  • the fourth embodiment a case will be described in which there are a plurality of switching destinations, that is, handover destination candidates, and the host device in the core network is also switched.
  • the contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • the host device for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity) or S-GW (Serving Gateway) can be cited as in the second embodiment.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • a radio communication system 406 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C is provided.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A forms a cell CA, and transmits and receives radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CA. Communication with the wireless terminal device 202 is possible.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
  • the wireless communication system 406 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MME 162A, 162B, 162C (communication control device), and P-GW (Packet Data) provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GW 161 gateway device
  • MME 162A, 162B, 162C communication control device
  • P-GW Packet Data
  • the wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163. Protocol) Communication data including packets is transmitted and received.
  • the S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163.
  • the communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
  • the MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401.
  • the MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 401.
  • the MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the MME 162C manages the wireless base station device 101C, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401.
  • the MME 162C transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101C.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines.
  • the wireless base station apparatus 101C and the MME 162C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
  • the MMEs 162A, 162B, 162C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162A, MME 162B, and MME 162C exchange various data with each other via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface that is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 52 is a sequence of a handover operation in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A becomes worse, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A.
  • a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S611).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
  • the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S612).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S613). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162A (step S614).
  • the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station devices 101B and 101C indicated in the handover request are their management targets (step S615).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B because the radio base station apparatus 101B is not a management target of the MME 162A (step S616).
  • the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A.
  • the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different.
  • the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is the same as the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S617).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S618).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S619).
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S620).
  • a target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or a new target packet is received from the S-GW 161.
  • data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers this target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the MME 162A when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S621).
  • a logical path hereinafter also referred to as data forwarding path
  • the S-GW 161 upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S622).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S623).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162C that manages the radio base station apparatus 101C because the radio base station apparatus 101C is not a management target of itself (step S624).
  • the MME 162C determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A.
  • the MME 162C includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different.
  • the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is the same as the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Therefore, the MME 162C determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S625).
  • the MME 162C transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S626).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162C and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162C (step S627).
  • the MME 162C transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162A (step S628).
  • the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path, to the S-GW 161 (step S629).
  • the S-GW 161 upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101C through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S630).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the wireless base station device 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S631).
  • step S632 the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S632). Note that the operations from step S616 to step S623 as described above and the operations from step S624 to step S631 are performed in parallel.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S633).
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S634).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S635).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the MME 162A (step S636).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S637).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S638).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S639).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S640).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B.
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161 (step S641).
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S642).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S643).
  • the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S644).
  • the S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Switch to 101B. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switch response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S645).
  • the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and stores the transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 that does not pass through the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S646).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, and is selected as the handover destination and notifies the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S647).
  • the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notice to the radio base station apparatus 101C received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162C (step S648).
  • the MME 162C receives the handover cancellation notification from the MME 162A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S649).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162C, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162C (step S650).
  • the MME 162C receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S651).
  • the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162C to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S652).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S653).
  • the MME 162A when the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A issues a request to delete the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. It transmits to GW161 (step S654).
  • the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101B via itself, and the data forwarding path deletion response. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S655).
  • the MME 162A When the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A issues a request to delete the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S656).
  • the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101C via the data transmission path, and receives a data forwarding path deletion response. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S657).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the MME 162.
  • the handover stop notification is transmitted to (step S647).
  • the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to.
  • the operations from step S647 to step S652 are performed before step S640.
  • the MME 162A receives the handover request indicating the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C as the handover destination from the wireless base station device 101A, and receives the handover request. Is determined for each of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. If the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C are not their own management targets, a handover request is sent to the MMEs 162B and 162C that manage the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Send.
  • the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the device 202 and the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
  • FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 407 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similarly to radio communication system 406 shown in FIG.
  • Base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C are provided.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA, selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, and then moves to an overlapping area of cell CA, cell CB, and cell CC. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
  • the wireless communication system 407 further includes S-GWs 161A, 161B, 161C (gateway devices), an MME 162 (communication control device), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301. .
  • the S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
  • the S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the S-GW 161C is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161C transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101C.
  • the MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 402.
  • the MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C and the S-GW 161C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
  • the MME 162 and the S-GWs 161A, 161B, and 161C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface that is a logical interface.
  • the S-GW 161A, 161B, 161C and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 54 is a sequence of a handover operation in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S661 to step S664 is the same as the operation from step S611 to step S614 shown in FIG. 52, and therefore, detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
  • the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C indicated in the handover request are their management targets. Here, since the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C are the management targets of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S665).
  • the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Further, in the MME 162, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is different from the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. It is determined whether or not (step S666).
  • the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Due to the difference, the downstream packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 from the higher level network and the upstream packet from the wireless terminal device 202 to the higher level network are connected between the wireless base station device 101B and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B so as to be able to pass through the GW 161B (step S667).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S668).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S669).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (Step S670).
  • the MME 162 transmits a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path establishment request to the S-GW 161B (step S671). ).
  • the S-GW 161B upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S672).
  • the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S673).
  • the S-GW 161A upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S674).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S675).
  • the MME 162 is different in S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Therefore, the S-GW 161C in which the downstream packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 from the higher level network and the upstream packet from the wireless terminal device 202 to the higher level network are connected between the wireless base station device 101C and the IP network 302. Is requested to the S-GW 161C to create a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S676).
  • the S-GW 161C receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C passing through the S-GW 161C, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S677).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S678).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S679).
  • the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path, to the S-GW 161C (step S680).
  • the S-GW 161C upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161C establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161C establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161C, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161C and radio base station apparatus 101C. Then, the S-GW 161C transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S681).
  • the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S682).
  • the S-GW 161A upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S674).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the wireless base station device 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S684).
  • step S685 the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed. Note that the operations from step S667 to step S675 as described above and the operations from step S676 to step S684 are performed in parallel.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S686).
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S687).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S688).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S689).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating the content of communication with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S690).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S691).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162.
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B (step S6492).
  • the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S693).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (Step S694).
  • the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending. Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and stores the transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B that does not pass through the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (Step S695).
  • the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S696).
  • the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S697).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and is selected as the handover destination and notifies the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. Is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S698).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161C to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C (Step S699).
  • the S-GW 161C receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S700).
  • the MME 162 receives a communication path deletion response from the S-GW 161C, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S701).
  • the wireless base station device 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S702).
  • the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S703).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S704).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S705).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the data forwarding path (step S706).
  • the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S707).
  • the S-GW 161B upon receiving a data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response. It transmits to MME162 (step S708).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path (Step S709).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161C to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161C and the radio base station apparatus 101C, that is, the data forwarding path (Step S710).
  • the S-GW 161A receives the data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, it deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response. It transmits to MME162 (step S711).
  • the S-GW 161C When the S-GW 161C receives the data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161C deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161C and the radio base station apparatus 101C, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. (Step S712).
  • the MME 162A receives the handover request indicating the radio base station devices 101B and 101C as the handover destination from the radio base station device 101A, and receives the handover request.
  • the gateway device 161A connected between the wireless base station device 101A and the upper network, and the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C and the upper network are connected. It is determined whether or not the existing gateway devices 161B and 161C are different, and a communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway devices 161B and 161C determined to be different.
  • the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the device 202 and the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A which is the communication connection destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202, selects a handover destination from a plurality of handover destination candidates.
  • the apparatus 202 may receive information indicating a plurality of handover destination candidates from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may select a handover destination from the plurality of handover destination candidates.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A wireless base station (101) is provided with a handover instruction unit (12) for instructing a wireless terminal (202) to perform a handover operation from said wireless base station (101) to another wireless station after receiving a response from the abovementioned other wireless base station to a request for the wireless terminal (202) to perform a handover operation from the wireless base station (101) to the other wireless base station. If a predetermined execution condition pertaining to communication quality between the wireless base station (101) and the wireless terminal (202) is not met after the handover instruction unit (12) receives the abovementioned response, the handover instruction unit (12) stops or suspends the provision of the instruction to the wireless terminal (202).

Description

無線基地局装置、無線端末装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムRadio base station apparatus, radio terminal apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
 本発明は、無線基地局装置、無線端末装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムに関し、特に、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおける無線基地局装置、無線端末装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムに関する。 The present invention relates to a radio base station apparatus, a radio terminal apparatus, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program, and more particularly, in a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. The present invention relates to a radio base station apparatus, a radio terminal apparatus, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program.
 従来、移動通信システムでは、半径数百メートルから数十キロメートルのセルすなわち無線端末装置が通信可能なエリアを形成する無線基地局装置(以下、マクロ基地局とも称する。)による通信サービスが提供されてきた。 Conventionally, in a mobile communication system, a communication service is provided by a radio base station apparatus (hereinafter also referred to as a macro base station) that forms an area in which a cell having a radius of several hundred meters to several tens of kilometers, that is, a radio terminal apparatus can communicate. It was.
 近年、移動通信サービスの加入者数の劇的な増加およびデータ通信による通信トラヒック量の増大から、より半径の小さいセルを形成することによって加入者および通信トラヒックを分散し、また、一定レベルの通信速度をユーザへ安定して提供することが望まれている。また、ビルの超高層化に伴う不感地対策のため、企業フロア内および一般家庭内への無線基地局装置の設置も望まれている。 In recent years, due to a dramatic increase in the number of subscribers of mobile communication services and an increase in the amount of communication traffic due to data communication, subscribers and communication traffic are distributed by forming smaller radius cells, and a certain level of communication It is desirable to provide speed to users in a stable manner. In addition, in order to deal with dead zones associated with the increase in the number of buildings, it is desired to install radio base station devices on the corporate floor and in ordinary households.
 これらの要望と併せて、無線基地局装置で使用される種々のデバイスの処理能力が飛躍的に向上したことによって無線基地局装置の小型化が進み、このような小型化された基地局が注目を集めている。 Together with these demands, the processing capability of various devices used in the radio base station apparatus has been dramatically improved, and the miniaturization of the radio base station apparatus has progressed. Collecting.
 この小型基地局(以下、フェムト基地局とも称する。)が形成するフェムトセル(Femto Cell)の半径は10メートル前後と小さいため、フェムト基地局は、マクロ基地局が形成するマクロセル(Macro Cell)の圏外となりマクロ基地局の設置が困難な屋内および地下街等の場所で使用されることが考えられる。 The radius of the femto cell formed by this small base station (hereinafter also referred to as a femto base station) is as small as about 10 meters, so the femto base station is the macro cell formed by the macro base station. It may be used in places such as indoors and underground malls where it is out of service area and it is difficult to install macro base stations.
 また、フェムト基地局は特定のエリアに多数設置されることから、フェムト基地局を直接コアネットワークに接続することは難しい。このため、特定のエリアに設置された多数のフェムト基地局を一旦、HeNB-GW等のゲートウェイ装置に接続し、フェムト基地局とコアネットワークとをHeNB-GW経由で接続することが考えられる。 Also, since many femto base stations are installed in a specific area, it is difficult to connect the femto base stations directly to the core network. For this reason, it is conceivable that a large number of femto base stations installed in a specific area are once connected to a gateway device such as a HeNB-GW, and the femto base station and the core network are connected via the HeNB-GW.
 また、フェムト基地局に加えて、マクロ基地局をベースに、たとえば半径100メートルから200メートルのピコセルを形成するピコ基地局も開発されている。 In addition to the femto base station, a pico base station that forms a pico cell with a radius of 100 to 200 meters, for example, has been developed based on a macro base station.
 このようなフェムト基地局、ピコ基地局およびマクロ基地局が混在する通信システムであるヘテロジーニアスネットワークでは、たとえばマクロセル内に複数のフェムトセルまたはピコセルが形成される。このため、無線端末装置のハンドオーバが起こりやすくなり、また、ハンドオーバを行なう状況も複雑になることから、ハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎたり、あるいは遅すぎたりするなど、不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれる場合がある(たとえば、3GPP TR 36.902 V9.3.1 2011.3(非特許文献1)参照)。 In a heterogeneous network that is a communication system in which such femto base stations, pico base stations, and macro base stations are mixed, for example, a plurality of femto cells or pico cells are formed in a macro cell. For this reason, handover of a radio terminal device is likely to occur, and the situation of handover is complicated, so that an inappropriate handover operation is performed such as the timing of handover being too early or too late (For example, see 3GPP TR 36.902 V9.3.1 2011.3 (Non-Patent Document 1)).
 非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。このような不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築する技術が望まれる。 When an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system. A technique for suppressing such an inappropriate handover operation and constructing a good communication system is desired.
 この発明は、上述の課題を解決するためになされたもので、その目的は、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることが可能な無線基地局装置、無線端末装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムを提供することである。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a radio base station apparatus capable of stabilizing communication by appropriately controlling a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, To provide a wireless terminal device, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program.
 (1)この発明のある局面に係わる無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置であって、自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうためのハンドオーバ要求部と、上記要求に対する上記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、上記無線端末装置に対して自己の無線基地局装置から上記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるためのハンドオーバ指示部とを備え、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 (1) A radio base station apparatus according to an aspect of the present invention transmits a radio signal to / from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system in which the radio terminal apparatus can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. A radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving, for requesting the other radio base station apparatus to perform a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus An instruction to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus upon receiving a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the handover request unit and the request The handover instruction unit receives the response, and receives the response from the wireless base station device and the wireless terminal device. When a predetermined execution condition regarding the quality of communication is not satisfied, or suspend abort the application of the instruction to the wireless terminal device.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (2)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受けて、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対して上記指示を与えず、上記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を上記他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 (2) Preferably, when the handover instruction unit receives the response and the execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit stops the handover operation without giving the instruction to the wireless terminal device. To the other radio base station apparatus.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の中止に伴い、たとえば他の無線基地局装置においてハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately release various resources secured for the handover operation in other radio base station apparatuses, for example, when the handover operation is stopped.
 (3)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受けて、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記実行条件が満たされるまで待機し、上記実行条件が満たされると上記無線端末装置に対して上記指示を与える。 (3) Preferably, the handover instruction unit receives the response and waits until the execution condition is satisfied when the execution condition is not satisfied, and when the execution condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal Give the above instructions to the device.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後、無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質が実行条件を満たした時点で、無線端末装置に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えることができるため、最適なタイミングでハンドオーバ動作を実行することができる。 With such a configuration, after completion of the handover operation preparation process, when the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus satisfies the execution condition, the handover operation instruction is given to the radio terminal apparatus Therefore, the handover operation can be executed at the optimal timing.
 (4)より好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記実行条件が満たされる前に所定の中止条件が満たされた場合には、上記無線端末装置に対して上記指示を与えず、上記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を上記他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 (4) More preferably, when the predetermined stop condition is satisfied before the execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device and performs the handover operation. The other radio base station apparatus is notified of the cancellation.
 このような構成により、タイマの満了等の適切なタイミング、または電波環境に応じた適切な条件でハンドオーバ動作を中止し、ハンドオーバ動作の待機時間の増大を防ぐことができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作の中止に伴い、たとえば他の無線基地局装置においてハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the handover operation at an appropriate timing such as the expiration of the timer or an appropriate condition according to the radio wave environment and prevent an increase in the standby time of the handover operation. Also, with the cancellation of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation in other radio base station apparatuses.
 (5)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 (5) Preferably, the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. Therefore, the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
 (6)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と同等である。 (6) Preferably, the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. The communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備期間において無線端末装置の電波環境が好転し、実行する必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することができるため、不要となったハンドオーバ動作の実行を抑制することができる。 With such a configuration, the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
 (7)より好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、上記中止条件は、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する条件であり、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて同等であるかまたは良い品質であり、上記中止条件の示す通信品質は、上記準備条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 (7) More preferably, the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. The cancellation condition is a condition related to communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the wireless terminal apparatus, and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the execution condition. The communication quality indicated by the cancellation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備期間において無線端末装置の電波環境が好転し、実行する必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することができるため、不要となったハンドオーバ動作の実行を抑制することができる。 With such a configuration, the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
 (8)より好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記ハンドオーバ動作の中止を上記他の無線基地局装置に通知する際、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質が条件を満たしていない旨を上記他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 (8) More preferably, when the handover instructing unit notifies the other radio base station device that the handover operation is stopped, the communication quality between the own radio base station device and the radio terminal device satisfies a condition. Notify the other radio base station apparatus that the mobile station has not been connected.
 これにより、他の無線基地局装置は、たとえばハンドオーバ動作に関するパラメータ設定の誤り等によってハンドオーバ動作が中止された事象との区別をつけることができる。このため、他の無線基地局装置における新たなパラメータ設定処理等の余計な処理の発生を防ぎ、かつハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 Thereby, the other radio base station apparatus can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting related to the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent occurrence of unnecessary processes such as new parameter setting processes in other radio base station apparatuses and appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
 (9)より好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、上記実行条件の示す通信品質および上記準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整するためのハンドオーバ条件調整部を備える。 (9) More preferably, the radio base station apparatus further includes a handover condition adjustment unit for adjusting a difference between the communication quality indicated by the execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition.
 このような構成により、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度、およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度の調整が可能となり、より適切なハンドオーバ動作を実現することができる。 Such a configuration makes it possible to adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of canceling handover operations, thereby realizing more appropriate handover operations.
 (10)より好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、上記実行条件の示す通信品質および前記準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整し、上記ハンドオーバ指示部によって上記ハンドオーバ動作の中止が他の無線基地局装置に通知された回数に基づいて上記差を調整するためのハンドオーバ条件調整部を備える。 (10) More preferably, the handover request unit sends the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. The radio base station apparatus further adjusts a difference between the communication quality indicated by the execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition, and the handover instruction unit cancels the handover operation by another radio base station. A handover condition adjusting unit is provided for adjusting the difference based on the number of times notified to the apparatus.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度の観点から、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度、およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度を適切に調整することができる。 Such a configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of cancellation of handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of handover operation cancellation.
 (11)より好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作が不適切であった回数を取得するためのハンドオーバ情報取得部を備え、上記ハンドオーバ条件調整部は、上記ハンドオーバ情報取得部によって取得された上記回数に基づいて上記差を調整する。 (11) More preferably, the radio base station apparatus further obtains the number of times that the handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus is inappropriate. An information acquisition unit is provided, and the handover condition adjustment unit adjusts the difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquisition unit.
 このような構成により、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度の観点から、不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度を適切に調整することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations and the frequency of canceling handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO”.
 (12)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御方法は、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置における通信制御方法であって、自己から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうステップと、上記要求に対する上記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、上記無線端末装置に対して自己から上記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップとを含み、上記指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップにおいては、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対して上記指示を与えず、上記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を上記他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 (12) A communication control method according to an aspect of the present invention is a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus. A communication control method in a radio base station apparatus for performing a request for performing a handover operation of a radio terminal apparatus from itself to another radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus, Receiving a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request and determining whether to give an instruction to perform a handover operation from itself to the other radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus; In the step of determining whether or not to give the instruction, the communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus If the constant execution condition is not satisfied, not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device, the effect to stop the handover operation to notify the other radio base station apparatus.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (13)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御プログラムは、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置において用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、コンピュータに、自己から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうステップと、上記要求に対する上記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、上記無線端末装置に対して自己から上記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムであり、上記指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップにおいては、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対して上記指示を与えず、上記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を上記他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 (13) A communication control program according to an aspect of the present invention transmits / receives a radio signal to / from a wireless terminal device in a communication system in which the wireless terminal device can communicate with a plurality of wireless base station devices by performing a handover operation. A communication control program used in a radio base station apparatus for performing a handover operation of a radio terminal apparatus from itself to another radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus And whether to give an instruction to perform a handover operation from itself to the other radio base station apparatus in response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request. In the step of determining whether to give the above instruction When the predetermined execution condition regarding the communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is not satisfied, the handover operation is stopped without giving the instruction to the radio terminal apparatus. To the other radio base station apparatus.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (14)好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、上記要求を複数の上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行う。 (14) Preferably, in the radio base station apparatus, the handover request unit makes the request to the plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 There may be a case where the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 In addition, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the preparation process for the handover operation with other neighboring base stations is completed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
 (15)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信して、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択し、上記無線端末装置に対して上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置への上記ハンドオーバ動作を行う指示を与える。 (15) Preferably, the handover instruction unit receives the response, selects a handover destination radio base station device from the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response, and transmits the response to the radio terminal device. An instruction to perform the handover operation is given to the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 このように、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択したうえで無線端末装置に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える構成により、当該指示内に複数の無線基地局装置を提示する場合と比べて情報量を少なくすることができ、当該指示内容を簡潔にすることができる。 In this way, by selecting a handover destination radio base station apparatus and giving an instruction for a handover operation to the radio terminal apparatus, the amount of information is larger than when a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction. The instruction content can be simplified.
 (16)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信した後、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の上記無線端末装置における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、上記測定結果に基づいて上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 (16) Preferably, after the response is received, the handover instruction unit obtains a measurement result of received power in the radio terminal device of a radio signal transmitted from the other radio base station device corresponding to the response. Then, based on the measurement result, the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備完了後の無線端末装置における電波環境に応じて、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate radio base station apparatus as a handover destination according to the radio wave environment in the radio terminal apparatus after completion of preparation for the handover operation.
 (17)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない上記測定結果に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置を上記ハンドオーバ先の候補から外す。 (17) Preferably, after receiving the response, the handover instruction unit excludes the other radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates.
 このような構成により、たとえば、無線端末装置が受信電力を測定できない程度に当該無線端末装置との距離が離れてしまった無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことができるため、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With such a configuration, for example, a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates. An appropriate radio base station apparatus can be selected.
 (18)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信して、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を上記無線端末装置へ送信する。 (18) Preferably, the handover instruction unit receives the response and transmits information indicating the other radio base station device corresponding to the response as a handover destination candidate to the radio terminal device.
 このように、無線端末装置にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択させる構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が選択する場合に比べて、最新の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 In this way, the configuration in which the radio terminal device selects the handover destination radio base station device, the handover destination radio base station device according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source radio base station device selects Can be selected.
 (19)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記無線端末装置によって選択された上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、受信した上記情報の示す上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ所定の情報を送信する。 (19) Preferably, the handover instruction unit receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, and the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the received information The predetermined information is transmitted to.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が、無線端末装置により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を把握したうえで、ハンドオーバ動作に必要な情報を当該ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ送信するので、無駄のない情報の送受信を行うことができる。 With such a configuration, after the handover source radio base station apparatus grasps the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, information necessary for the handover operation is transferred to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. Therefore, it is possible to transmit and receive information without waste.
 (20)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ動作の中止要求を送信する。 (20) Preferably, the handover instruction unit, after the handover operation is completed, of the other radio base station apparatuses other than the handover destination radio base station apparatus among the other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the response. A request for canceling the handover operation is transmitted to.
 ここで、たとえば、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作がハンドオーバ動作の完了前に中止された後、無線端末装置が、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置に近づく方向に移動する場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置が最適なハンドオーバ先となることがある。この場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を再び行う必要がある。 Here, for example, after the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination is canceled before the handover operation is completed, the radio terminal apparatus In the case of moving in the direction approaching, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
 これに対して、本発明に係る無線基地局装置は、上記のように、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後に中止する。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作が完了するまでの間に無線端末装置が移動して電波状況が変わり、他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合であっても、再びハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行う必要がない。 On the other hand, as described above, the radio base station apparatus according to the present invention performs the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination as the handover operation preparation process of the radio terminal apparatus. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need.
 (21)この発明のある局面に係わる無線端末装置は、無線基地局装置との間で無線信号を送受信し、ハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な無線端末装置であって、自己と通信接続を確立している無線基地局装置であるサービング基地局から複数の他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を受信するための受信部と、上記受信部により受信された上記情報の示す複数の上記他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択するための選択部と、上記選択部により選択された上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を上記サービング基地局へ送信して、上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置との通信接続を新たに確立するための通信制御部とを備える。 (21) A radio terminal apparatus according to an aspect of the present invention is a radio terminal apparatus capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from the radio base station apparatus and performing a handover operation. A receiving unit for receiving information indicating a plurality of other radio base station devices as handover destination candidates from a serving base station that is a radio base station device that has established a communication connection with itself; and A selection unit for selecting a handover destination radio base station device from among the plurality of other radio base station devices indicated by the received information, and the handover destination radio base station device selected by the selection unit And a communication control unit for newly establishing a communication connection with the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 このように、無線端末装置にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択させる構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が選択する場合に比べて、最新の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 In this way, the configuration in which the radio terminal device selects the handover destination radio base station device, the handover destination radio base station device according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source radio base station device selects Can be selected.
 (22)この発明のある局面に係わる通信システムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムであって、上記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、上記対応の通信制御装置は、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の通信制御装置は、受信した上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると上記対応の通信制御装置へ上記応答を送信し、上記対応の通信制御装置は、上記他の通信制御装置から上記応答を受信して、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、上記無線基地局装置は、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 (22) A communication system according to an aspect of the present invention is provided for managing a plurality of radio base station apparatuses for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio terminal apparatus, and one or more radio base station apparatuses. A communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to a corresponding communication control device The corresponding communication control apparatus, when the other radio base station apparatus to be handed over indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the other communication control apparatus, manages the other radio base station apparatus. The other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the other radio base station apparatus. The response to the handover request is received from the corresponding communication control apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmits the handover request source. Whether the wireless base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal apparatus is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the communication control apparatus that manages the handover source radio base station apparatus is different from the communication control apparatus that manages the handover destination radio base station apparatus, prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. Since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (23)好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記無線基地局装置は、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 (23) Preferably, in the communication system, the radio base station apparatus sends the handover request to the corresponding communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. The communication quality that is transmitted and indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、通信制御装置の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the communication control device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 (24)好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記対応の通信制御装置は、上記無線基地局装置からハンドオーバ先として複数の上記他の無線基地局装置を示す上記ハンドオーバ要求を受信し、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示す上記他の無線基地局装置ごとに自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断し、自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信する。 (24) Preferably, in the communication system, the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of the other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and Each of the other radio base station devices shown is determined whether it is a management target of itself, and if it is not a management target of itself, the handover to another communication control device that manages the other radio base station device Send a request.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 There may be a case where the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 In addition, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the preparation process for the handover operation with other neighboring base stations is completed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
 (25)この発明のある局面に係わる通信システムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを上記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、上記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムであって、上記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信し、上記通信制御装置は、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている上記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信し、上記ゲートウェイ装置は、上記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上記上位ネットワークから送信される上記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび上記無線端末装置から送信される上記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、上記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を上記通信制御装置へ送信し、上記通信制御装置は、上記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、上記無線基地局装置は、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 (25) A communication system according to an aspect of the present invention is provided for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device, and one or more radio base station devices. The communication control device is connected between the one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the higher level network, transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the higher level network, and A communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from a higher-level network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device transmits another wireless base station from itself A handover request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device to a station device is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device A gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, and a gateway device connected between the other radio base station device at the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network Are different from each other, the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway apparatus connected between the other radio base station apparatus and the upper network, and the gateway apparatus receives the communication path creation request. Then, a communication path that enables relaying of the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network is created, and in response to the communication path creation request A communication path creation response is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device Upon receiving a route creation response, the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station device, and when a response to the handover request is received from the other radio base station device, the radio base station that is the transmission source of the handover request A handover instruction is transmitted to the apparatus, the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and If the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation on the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (26)好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記無線基地局装置は、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信し、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 (26) Preferably, in the communication system, the radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. The communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、ゲートウェイ装置の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the gateway device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 (27)好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記通信制御装置は、上記無線基地局装置からハンドオーバ先として複数の他の上記無線基地局装置を示す上記ハンドオーバ要求を受信し、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示す上記他の無線基地局装置ごとに、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なるか否かを判断し、異なると判断した上記ゲートウェイ装置へ上記通信経路作成要求を送信する。 (27) Preferably, in the communication system, the communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and indicates the handover request indicated by the handover request. For each other radio base station apparatus, a gateway apparatus connected between the radio base station apparatus and the upper network, and a gateway connected between the other radio base station apparatus and the upper network It is determined whether or not the device is different, and the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device determined to be different.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 There may be a case where the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 In addition, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the preparation process for the handover operation with other neighboring base stations is completed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
 (28)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御方法は、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、上記他の通信制御装置が、受信した上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると上記対応の通信制御装置へ上記応答を送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記他の通信制御装置から上記応答を受信して、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む。 (28) A communication control method according to an aspect of the present invention is for managing a plurality of radio base station apparatuses for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal apparatus and one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses. A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device responds to a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device. The step of transmitting to the communication control device, and the corresponding communication control device, when the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the other radio base station device A step of transmitting the handover request to another communication control device that manages the communication, and the other communication control device transmits the received handover request to the Transmitting the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus upon receiving a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus Receiving the response from the communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request, and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the terminal device is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device is given. Suspending or deferring.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the communication control apparatus that manages the handover source radio base station apparatus is different from the communication control apparatus that manages the handover destination radio base station apparatus, prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. Since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (29)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御方法は、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを上記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、上記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている上記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、上記ゲートウェイ装置が、上記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上記上位ネットワークから送信される上記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび上記無線端末装置から送信される上記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、上記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む。 (29) A communication control method according to an aspect of the present invention is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. The communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network, A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device A handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from the mobile station to another radio base station device is transmitted to the communication control device A gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request, and the upper network; If the gateway device connected between is different from the gateway device connected to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the higher-level network, the communication path creation request, When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, communication that enables relaying of the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network Create a route and send a communication route creation response to the communication route creation request And when the communication control apparatus receives the communication path creation response, the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio base station apparatus responds to the handover request. When receiving the response, a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request, and a communication between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus when the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition related to quality is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended. Steps.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (30)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御プログラムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信プログラムであって、コンピュータに、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、上記他の通信制御装置が、受信した上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると上記対応の通信制御装置へ上記応答を送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記他の通信制御装置から上記応答を受信して、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムである。 (30) A communication control program according to an aspect of the present invention manages a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. A communication program used in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the wireless base station device performs handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device in a computer A step of transmitting a request to the corresponding communication control device; and when the other radio base station device at the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the corresponding communication control device, The step of transmitting the handover request to another communication control apparatus that manages the radio base station apparatus, and the other communication control apparatus, Transmitting the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, receiving the response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, and transmitting the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus; The communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request; and the radio base station apparatus performs the handover An instruction is received and it is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal apparatus is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, handover to the wireless terminal apparatus is performed This is a program for executing a step of canceling or deferring the assignment of an instruction for performing an operation.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the communication control apparatus that manages the handover source radio base station apparatus is different from the communication control apparatus that manages the handover destination radio base station apparatus, prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. Since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (31)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御プログラムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを上記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、上記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信プログラムであって、コンピュータに、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている上記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、上記ゲートウェイ装置が、上記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上記上位ネットワークから送信される上記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび上記無線端末装置から送信される上記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、上記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムである。 (31) A communication control program according to an aspect of the present invention is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. The communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network, A communication program used in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, the computer storing the wireless base station A handheld device that performs a handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device. Transmitting a communication request to the communication control device; a gateway device connected between the wireless base station device and the higher-level network; and the other handover destination indicated by the handover request. When the gateway device connected between the wireless base station device and the upper network is different, a communication path creation request is connected between the other wireless base station device and the upper network. Transmitting to the gateway device; and when the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the upper network transmitted from the wireless terminal device Create a communication path that can relay communication data to A communication path creation response to the communication control apparatus, and when the communication control apparatus receives the communication path creation response, the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio When a response to the handover request is received from the base station device, a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the wireless base station device that is a transmission source of the handover request; and the wireless base station device receives the handover instruction, and It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal apparatus is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, an instruction for performing a handover operation for the wireless terminal apparatus is issued. This is a program for executing the step of canceling or holding the grant.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 本発明によれば、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to stabilize the communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of an improper handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection process in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the improper handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection process in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the improper handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) and its detection process in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、無線端末装置の受信品質のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the simulation result of the reception quality of the radio | wireless terminal apparatus in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA1を示す図である。In the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows event A1 in which a radio | wireless terminal apparatus transmits a notification of a measurement result. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA2を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA3を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A3 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA4を示す図である。It is a figure which shows event A4 which a radio | wireless terminal apparatus transmits a measurement result notification in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA5を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A5 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ヒステリシスHSの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the timing control of the hand-over operation by adjustment of hysteresis HS in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、TTTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the timing control of the hand-over operation by adjustment of TTT in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、オフセットOSTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating timing control of a handover operation by adjusting an offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the control part in the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいてハンドオーバ動作に要する時間の内訳の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the breakdown of the time which a hand-over operation | movement requires in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける無線環境パラメータを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the radio | wireless environment parameter in the radio | wireless communications system of simulation object. シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける電力測定処理(Measurement)のパラメータを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the parameter of the electric power measurement process (Measurement) in the radio | wireless communications system of simulation object. ハンドオーバ失敗確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the simulation result of a handover failure probability. ”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the simulation result of the generation | occurrence | production probability of "Ping Pong HO". 図28に示すハンドオーバ失敗確率、および図29に示す”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率の和を示す図である。FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 28 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG. 29. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による改善対象を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the improvement object by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are satisfied. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are not satisfied. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are satisfied. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are not satisfied. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are satisfied. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the conditions for executing the handover operation are not satisfied. ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the condition where two or more radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination exist. 図41に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例における課題を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the subject in an example of the condition where there exist multiple radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination. 図43に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 43. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, it is a sequence of a handover operation when a handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination. RRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の比較例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration | reconstruction instruction | indication. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ要求部から送信されるRRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the message structure of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction | indication transmitted from the handover request | requirement part in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの無線端末装置の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio | wireless terminal apparatus of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation when a radio terminal apparatus selects a handover destination. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。It is a sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。It is a sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention.
 以下、本発明の実施の形態について図面を用いて説明する。なお、図中同一または相当部分には同一符号を付してその説明は繰り返さない。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the drawings, the same or corresponding parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will not be repeated.
 無線基地局装置は、自らの形成するセルおよび周辺セルについての情報、すなわち無線信号の周波数および周辺セルのID(identification)等を無線端末装置に通知する。無線端末装置は、無線基地局装置から通知された情報に基づいて、周辺セルの検出および測定を行なう。無線端末装置は、この測定結果に基づいて、周辺セルへの移動を開始する。ここで、無線端末装置の「移動」とは、ハンドオーバを意味することに加えて、アイドル状態の無線端末装置が今後通信を開始する、すなわち通話またはデータ通信を開始する際にどのセルを介して通信を行なうかを選択することを意味する。 The radio base station apparatus notifies the radio terminal apparatus of information about the cell and the neighboring cell that it forms, that is, the frequency of the radio signal and the ID (identification) of the neighboring cell. The wireless terminal device detects and measures neighboring cells based on information notified from the wireless base station device. The wireless terminal device starts moving to the neighboring cell based on the measurement result. Here, “movement” of the wireless terminal device means not only handover but also through which cell the wireless terminal device in an idle state starts communication in the future, that is, when a call or data communication is started. This means selecting whether to perform communication.
 たとえば、無線端末装置が無線基地局装置と通信しているときには、無線端末装置の移動先は無線基地局装置またはコアネットワークにおける上位装置が決定する。また、たとえば、無線端末装置が無線基地局装置と通信していないときには、無線端末装置の移動先は無線端末装置が決定する。 For example, when the wireless terminal device is communicating with the wireless base station device, the destination of the wireless terminal device is determined by the wireless base station device or the higher-level device in the core network. For example, when the wireless terminal device is not communicating with the wireless base station device, the wireless terminal device determines the destination of the wireless terminal device.
 また、ハンドオーバとは、通話中またはデータ通信中の無線端末装置の通信相手となる無線基地局装置が切り替えられることを意味する。 In addition, handover means that a radio base station apparatus that is a communication partner of a radio terminal apparatus during a call or data communication is switched.
 また、無線端末装置がセルに在圏している、とは、無線端末装置が、当該セルを形成する無線基地局装置を通信先として選択し、かつ当該無線基地局装置と通信可能な状態または通信中である状態を意味する。 The wireless terminal device is located in a cell means that the wireless terminal device selects a wireless base station device forming the cell as a communication destination and can communicate with the wireless base station device. This means that communication is in progress.
 フェムトセルおよびアクセスモードは、3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project) SPEC TS22.220において以下のように説明されている。すなわち、フェムト基地局は、無線インタフェースを介して接続されている無線端末装置を、IPバックホール(backhaul)を用いて、移動通信事業者網に接続する顧客構内装置である。 The femtocell and access mode are described in 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) SPEC TS 22.220 as follows. That is, a femto base station is a customer premises apparatus that connects a wireless terminal device connected via a wireless interface to a mobile communication carrier network using an IP backhaul.
 また、フェムトセルのアクセスモードにおいて、クローズドアクセスモードのフェムト基地局は、関連するCSG(Closed Subscriber Group)メンバーにのみサービスを提供する。また、ハイブリッドモードのフェムト基地局は、関連するCSGメンバーおよびCSGノンメンバーにサービスを提供する。また、オープンアクセスモードのフェムト基地局は、通常の基地局として動作する。 In addition, in the access mode of the femto cell, the femto base station in the closed access mode provides a service only to related CSG (Closed Subscriber Group) members. The hybrid mode femto base station also provides services to the associated CSG members and CSG non-members. The femto base station in the open access mode operates as a normal base station.
 本発明の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいても、このような3GPPの定義を適用してもよい。 Such a 3GPP definition may also be applied to the wireless communication system according to the embodiment of the present invention.
 また、上記定義と合わせて、あるいは別個に、以下のような定義を適用することも可能である。 Also, the following definitions can be applied together with the above definitions or separately.
 マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局は、事業者の管理下にあり、事業者と契約している無線基地局装置が通信可能な無線基地局装置である。また、マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局は、基本的に電源がオフになることはないと考えられる。 The macro base station and the pico base station are radio base station devices that are under the control of the operator and that can communicate with the radio base station device that has contracted with the operator. Further, it is considered that the macro base station and the pico base station are basically not turned off.
 また、フェムト基地局は、主に個人または法人の建物内に設置され、ユーザの事情により移動するまたは電源がオフとなる可能性がある無線基地局装置である。 Also, the femto base station is a radio base station apparatus that is mainly installed in an individual or corporate building and may move or be turned off depending on user circumstances.
 また、フェムト基地局は、オープン/ハイブリッド/クローズドのいずれかのアクセスモードで動作する。フェムト基地局は、クローズドアクセスモードで動作する場合には、登録済みのメンバー(端末)のみ接続可能となる。また、クローズドアクセスモードで動作する場合には、登録済みのメンバーにのみサービスを提供する。また、ハイブリッドモードで動作する場合には、登録済みのメンバー、および未登録のメンバーすなわちノンメンバーの両方にサービスを提供する。また、オープンアクセスモードで動作する場合には、マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局と同じ動作をする。 In addition, the femto base station operates in an access mode of open / hybrid / closed. When the femto base station operates in the closed access mode, only registered members (terminals) can be connected. When operating in the closed access mode, the service is provided only to registered members. When operating in the hybrid mode, the service is provided to both registered members and unregistered members, that is, non-members. When operating in the open access mode, the same operation as that of the macro base station and the pico base station is performed.
 <第1の実施の形態>
 [構成および基本動作]
 図1は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。
<First Embodiment>
[Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図1を参照して、無線通信システムは、たとえば3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project)で規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101Bを備える。図1では、2つの無線基地局装置を代表的に示しているが、さらに多数の無線基地局装置が設けられてもよい。 Referring to FIG. 1, the radio communication system is a mobile communication system that complies with LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by, for example, 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project), and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B. In FIG. 1, two radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
 無線基地局装置101A,101Bは、たとえばフェムト基地局、ピコ基地局またはマクロ基地局である。 Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B are, for example, femto base stations, pico base stations, or macro base stations.
 無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCAを形成し、セルCA内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBを形成し、セルCB内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 The wireless base station device 101A can communicate with the wireless terminal device 202 by forming a cell CA and transmitting / receiving a wireless signal to / from the wireless terminal device 202 existing in the cell CA. The radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
 ここで、無線端末装置からコアネットワークへの方向を上り方向と称し、コアネットワークから無線端末装置への方向を下り方向と称する。 Here, the direction from the wireless terminal device to the core network is referred to as an uplink direction, and the direction from the core network to the wireless terminal device is referred to as a downlink direction.
 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける無線基地局装置および無線端末装置は、以下の各シーケンスの各ステップを含むプログラムを図示しないメモリから読み出して実行する。このプログラムは、外部からインストールすることができる。このインストールされるプログラムは、たとえば記録媒体に格納された状態で流通する。 The radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the radio communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention read and execute a program including each step of the following sequences from a memory (not shown). This program can be installed externally. The installed program is distributed in a state stored in a recording medium, for example.
 図2は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ここでは、図1に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、セルCAおよびセルCBの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 1, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
 図2を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己と通信中の無線端末装置202の測定対象となる周波数と、当該周波数の無線信号を送信する他の無線基地局装置とを設定する(ステップS1)。 Referring to FIG. 2, first, radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S1).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、設定した他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信レベルを無線端末装置202に測定させるための測定開始要求(Measurement Configuration)を無線端末装置202へ送信する。この測定開始要求には、周辺セル情報、すなわち測定対象となる無線基地局装置のセルIDが含まれる。また、この測定開始要求には、各無線基地局装置の送信周波数が含まれる(ステップS2)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A sends a measurement start request (Measurement Configuration) to the wireless terminal device 202 to cause the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the set other wireless base station device. Send. This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S2).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから測定開始要求を受信して、電力測定処理(Measurement)を開始する、すなわち受信した測定開始要求の示す周波数において、測定開始要求の示す無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定する(ステップS3)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the measurement start request from the wireless base station device 101A and starts the power measurement process (Measurement), that is, the wireless indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request. The received power of the radio signal transmitted from the base station apparatus is measured (step S3).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、この受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS4)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (Measurement Report) indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S4).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する(ステップS5)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S5).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202がハンドオーバすべきか否かを判断し、ハンドオーバすべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS6)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as a handover destination with reference to the information (step S6).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置へ送信する(ステップS7)。 Next, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101B to the higher-level device (step S7).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS8)。 Next, the host apparatus receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S8).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、上位装置からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、上位装置へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS9)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level apparatus and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level apparatus (Step S9).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS10)。 Next, the higher-level device receives a handover response from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S10).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、無線端末装置202へRRC(Radio Resource Control)コネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS11)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and transmits an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S11).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS12)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the higher-level device (step S12).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aから状態通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS13)。 Next, the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S13).
 また、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS14)。 When the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B ( Step S14).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、上位装置へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS15)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S15).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS16)。 Next, the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S16).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、上位装置へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS17)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases the information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S17).
 [不適切なハンドオーバ動作の例]
 以下、無線端末装置202と通信中の無線基地局装置またはハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置をサービング基地局とも称し、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を周辺基地局とも称する。
[Example of inappropriate handover operation]
Hereinafter, a radio base station apparatus communicating with the radio terminal apparatus 202 or a handover source radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a serving base station, and a handover destination radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a neighboring base station.
 図3は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図4は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ”Too Late HO”は、たとえば以下のような場合をいう。すなわち、ハンドオーバが始まる前、あるいはハンドオーバ処理の最中に、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置について無線リンク断(RLF:Radio Link Failure)が発生し、かつハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置に対する無線端末装置202の接続再確立が生じた場合である。 “Too Late HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, before handover starts or during handover processing, a radio link failure (RLF) occurs in the handover source radio base station apparatus, and a radio base station other than the handover source radio base station apparatus. This is a case where connection re-establishment of the wireless terminal device 202 to the device has occurred.
 ”Too Late HO”の検出方法は、たとえば以下のようになる。すなわち、無線端末装置202が無線基地局装置101AについてRLFを起こした後に無線基地局装置101Bに対して無線リンクを再確立した場合、無線基地局装置101Bが無線基地局装置101Aに対してRLF通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Aは”Too Late HO”を検出する。 The detection method of “Too Late HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the radio terminal device 202 reestablishes the radio link to the radio base station device 101B after causing the RLF for the radio base station device 101A, the radio base station device 101B notifies the radio base station device 101A of the RLF. Send. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101A detects “Too Late HO”.
 ここでは、図3に示すように、無線端末装置202は、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である場合を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 3, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A.
 図3および図4を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、各無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定し、測定した受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS51)。 Referring to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from each radio base station apparatus, and wirelessly sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power. It transmits to base station apparatus 101A (step S51).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきか否かを判断する。無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS52)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. When it is determined that the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be handed over, the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S52).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、基地局間インタフェースであるX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS53)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an inter-base station interface (step S53).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答をX2インタフェース経由で送信する(ステップS54)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S54).
 ここで、ネットワーク側のハンドオーバの準備中、すなわち無線基地局装置101Aおよび101Bが上記のようなハンドオーバのためのメッセージの送受信を行っている間に、無線端末装置202が、セルCAの圏外、かつセルCBの圏内に移動する(ステップS55)。 Here, while preparing for handover on the network side, that is, while the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B are transmitting and receiving a message for handover as described above, the radio terminal apparatus 202 is out of service area of the cell CA, and Move to within the cell CB (step S55).
 この無線端末装置202の移動により、無線基地局装置101Aから送信されるハンドオーバを指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示(ステップS56)が無線端末装置202に届かなくなり、RLFが発生してしまう(ステップS57)。 Due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202, the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (step S56) for instructing the handover transmitted from the wireless base station device 101A does not reach the wireless terminal device 202, and RLF is generated (step S56). S57).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RLF発生を検出すると、無線信号の受信電力の測定等によって周辺の無線基地局装置の探索を行ない、探索した無線基地局装置101Bに再接続するために、RRCコネクション再確立要求(RRC Connection Reestablishment Request)を送信する(ステップS58)。 Next, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 detects the occurrence of RLF, the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101B. A connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S58).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再確立要求を受信して、RRCコネクション再確立応答を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS59)。これにより、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立される。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment response to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S59). Thereby, an RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再確立完了通知(RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete)を送信する(ステップS60)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification (RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B (step S60).
 このRRCコネクション再確立完了通知は、たとえば”rlf-InfoAvailable”というパラメータを含む。無線端末装置202は、このパラメータを設定してRRCコネクション再確立完了通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該無線端末装置202についてRLFの発生があったことを認識する。無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFの詳細な情報を取得するため、端末情報要求(UE Information Request)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS61)。 This RRC connection re-establishment completion notification includes a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”, for example. The wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S61).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報要求を受信して、RLFレポートを含む端末情報応答(UE Information Response)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS62)。RLFレポートは、RLFの発生した無線基地局装置のPCI(Physical Cell ID)、RRCコネクション再確立の発生した無線基地局装置のPCIおよびECGI(E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier)ならびに自己の無線端末装置202のC-RNTI(Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier)等を含む。ここでは、RLF発生のPCIは無線基地局装置101AのIDであり、RRCコネクション再確立発生のPCIおよびECGIは無線基地局装置101BのIDであり、C-RNTIは無線基地局装置101Aが付与したIDである。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101B, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101B (step S62). The RLF report includes the PCI (Physical Cell ID) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection has been reestablished, and the own radio terminal apparatus 202. C-RNTI (Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier), etc. Here, the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A, the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment occurrence are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B, and the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101A ID.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202から受信したRLFレポートのPCIを参照することにより、無線基地局装置101AにおいてRLFが発生したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、”Too Late HO”であることを通知するために、当該RLFレポートの内容を含むRLF通知(RLF INDICATION)をX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS63)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101A by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the contents of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO” ( Step S63).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したRLF通知のPCI、ECGIおよびC-RNTIを参照することにより、セルCBへの”Too Late HO”が発生したことを認識する(ステップS64)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that “Too Late HO” has occurred to the cell CB by referring to the PCI, ECGI, and C-RNTI of the RLF notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B. (Step S64).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCBへの”Too Late HO”の発生が抑制されるように、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化処理を実行する(ステップS65)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A executes a handover operation optimization process so as to suppress the occurrence of “Too Late HO” in the cell CB (step S65).
 図5および図6は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。 5 and 6 are diagrams illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) has occurred in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図5および図6を参照して、無線基地局装置101Bの形成するセルCBは、無線基地局装置101Bの設置エリアを含むセルCB1と、セルCA内に形成された、無線基地局装置101Bの設置エリアを含まないセルCB2とで構成される。 5 and 6, cell CB formed by radio base station apparatus 101B includes cell CB1 including the installation area of radio base station apparatus 101B, and radio base station apparatus 101B formed in cell CA. The cell CB2 does not include an installation area.
 図7は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ”Too Early HO”は、たとえば以下のような場合をいう。すなわち、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置に対する接続を成功した後、RLFが短時間で発生し、かつ、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置に対して、当該無線端末装置202の接続再確立が生じた場合である。 “Too Early HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and the wireless terminal device 202 is reconnected to the handover source wireless base station device. This is the case when establishment occurs.
 ”Too Early HO”の検出方法は、たとえば以下のようになる。すなわち、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートをハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aから受信した場合において、当該受信タイミングからさかのぼって所定時間内に、当該無線端末装置202の自己へのハンドオーバの完了による端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信していたときに、”Too Early HO”である旨を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 The detection method of “Too Early HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report from the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A, the handover to the radio terminal apparatus 202 itself is performed within a predetermined time from the reception timing. When the terminal information release instruction upon completion of the transmission is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “Too Early HO”.
 ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、上記所定時間を計測するために、タイマを用いる。これにより、無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートを受信した場合において、自己の”Too Late HO”によってRLFが発生したのか、無線基地局装置101Aの”Too Early HO”によってRLFが発生したのかを判別することができる。 Here, the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. As a result, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “Too Early HO” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
 ここでは、図5に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、セルCB2内へ移動した場合(ステップS70)を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 5, a case is assumed in which radio terminal apparatus 202 moves into cell CB2 from a state where it is located in cell CA and is communicating with radio base station apparatus 101A (step S70). .
 図5~図7を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定し、測定した受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101A(Source eNB,Serving eNB)へ送信する(ステップS71)。 5 to 7, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the reception power of a radio signal transmitted from a radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the measured reception power to radio base station. It transmits to station apparatus 101A (Source eNB, Serving eNB) (step S71).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきか否かを判断する。無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS72)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. When determining that the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be handed over, the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S72).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、基地局間インタフェースであるX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS73)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S73).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答をX2インタフェース経由で送信する(ステップS74)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S74).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS75)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S75).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS76)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S76).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS77)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S77).
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202のセルCBにおける滞在時間を計測するために、タイマをスタートさせる(ステップS78)。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the stay time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S78).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を解放する(ステップS79)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S79).
 以上により、無線端末装置202の無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバが完了する(ステップS80)。 As described above, the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S80).
 ここで、無線端末装置202が、測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する前に、セルCBの圏外かつセルCAの圏内に移動する(ステップS81)。 Here, before transmitting the measurement result notification (Measurement Report) to the radio base station apparatus 101B, the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves outside the cell CB and within the cell CA (step S81).
 そうすると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bと通信できなくなることから、RLFが発生してしまう(ステップS83)。 Then, since the wireless terminal device 202 cannot communicate with the wireless base station device 101B, RLF occurs (step S83).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RLF発生を検出すると、無線信号の受信電力の測定等によって周辺の無線基地局装置の探索を行ない、探索した無線基地局装置101Aに再接続するために、RRCコネクション再確立要求(RRC Connection Reestablishment Request)を送信する(ステップS84)。 Next, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 detects the occurrence of RLF, the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101A. A connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S84).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を解放済みであり、保持していないことから、当該無線端末装置202からのRRCコネクション再確立要求を受け入れることができず(ステップS85)、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を当該無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS86)。 Next, since the radio base station apparatus 101A has released and does not hold the information (UE Context) regarding the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A can accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202. If it is not possible (step S85), an RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S86).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を無線基地局装置101Aから受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aと通常の接続手順をスタートさせる(ステップS87)。 Next, when receiving the RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio terminal apparatus 202 starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S87).
 すなわち、まず、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション要求(RRC Connection Request)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS88)。 That is, first, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101A (step S88).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション要求を受信して、RRCコネクション情報(RRC Connection Setup)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS89)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S89).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101AからRRCコネクション情報を受信して、RRCコネクション完了通知(RRC Connection Setup Complete)を送信する(ステップS90)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S90).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション完了通知を受信して、セキュリティ情報(Security Mode Command)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS91)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S91).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aからセキュリティ情報を受信して、セキュリティ完了通知(Security Mode Complete)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS92)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A (step S92).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS93)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S93).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101A間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101AへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS94)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A. (Step S94).
 ここで、RRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知は、たとえば”rlf-InfoAvailable”というパラメータを含む。無線端末装置202は、このパラメータを設定してRRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202についてRLFの発生があったことを認識する。無線基地局装置101Aは、RLFの詳細な情報を取得するため、端末情報要求(UE Information Request)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS95)。 Here, the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”. The wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification. As a result, the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202. The wireless base station device 101A transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S95).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報要求を受信して、RLFレポートを含む端末情報応答(UE Information Response)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS96)。RLFレポートは、RLFの発生した無線基地局装置のPCI、RRCコネクション再確立の発生した無線基地局装置のPCIおよびECGIならびに自己の無線端末装置202のC-RNTIを含む。ここでは、RLF発生のPCIは無線基地局装置101BのIDであり、RRCコネクション再確立発生のPCIおよびECGIは無線基地局装置101AのIDであり、C-RNTIは無線基地局装置101Bが付与したIDである。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101A (step S96). The RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B, the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A, and the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信したRLFレポートのPCIを参照することにより、無線基地局装置101BにおいてRLFが発生しことを認識し、セルCAへの”Too Late HO”が発生したと判断する(ステップS97)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CA. "Is generated (step S97).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、”Too Late HO”であることを通知するために、当該RLFレポートの内容を含むRLF通知(RLF INDICATION)をX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS98)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S98).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101AからRLF通知を受信すると、スタートさせておいたタイマを確認し、タイマが動作している場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから所定時間経過していない場合には、セルCAへの”Too Late HO”ではなく、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”であると判断する。なお、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101AからRLF通知を受信したときにタイマが動作していない場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから上記所定時間経過している場合には、セルCAへの”Too Late HO”であると判断する。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined not to be “Too Late HO” to the cell CA but to “Too Early HO” to the cell CB. When the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CA It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
 無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”であると判断すると(ステップS99)、ハンドオーバレポートを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS100)。このハンドオーバレポートは、たとえば”Handover Report Type”というパラメータを含む。無線基地局装置101Bは、このパラメータを所定値に設定することにより、”Too Early HO”を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 When the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “Too Early HO” to the cell CB (step S99), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S100). This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”. The radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “Too Early HO” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから当該ハンドオーバレポートを受信して、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”が発生したことを認識し(ステップS101)、”Too Early HO”の発生が抑制されるように、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化処理を実行する(ステップS102)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “Too Early HO” has occurred to the cell CB (step S101), and “Too Early HO”. A handover operation optimization process is executed so as to suppress the occurrence of (step S102).
 図8は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図8を参照して、無線通信システムは、図1に示す無線通信システムと比べて、さらに、無線基地局装置101Cを備える。無線基地局装置101Cは、たとえばフェムト基地局、ピコ基地局またはマクロ基地局である。 Referring to FIG. 8, the wireless communication system further includes a wireless base station device 101 </ b> C as compared with the wireless communication system illustrated in FIG. 1. Radio base station apparatus 101C is, for example, a femto base station, a pico base station, or a macro base station.
 無線基地局装置101Cは、セルCCを形成し、セルCC内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 The radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
 図9は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ”HO to Wrong Cell”は、たとえば以下のような場合をいう。すなわち、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置との接続に成功した後、短時間でRLFが発生し、かつハンドオーバ元およびハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置に対する、無線端末装置202の接続再確立が生じた場合である。 “HO to Wong Cell” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and wireless communication is performed with respect to wireless base station devices other than the handover source and handover destination wireless base station devices. This is a case where the connection re-establishment of the terminal device 202 occurs.
 ”HO to Wrong Cell”の検出方法は、たとえば以下のようになる。すなわち、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートをハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101A以外の無線基地局装置101Cから受信した場合において、当該受信タイミングからさかのぼって所定時間内に、当該無線端末装置202の自己へのハンドオーバの完了による端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信していたときに、”HO to Wrong Cell”である旨を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 For example, the detection method of “HO to Wong Cell” is as follows. That is, when the radio base station apparatus 101B that is the handover destination receives the RLF report from the radio base station apparatus 101C other than the radio base station apparatus 101A that is the handover source, the radio terminal is traced back from the reception timing within a predetermined time. When the terminal information release instruction due to the completion of the handover of the apparatus 202 to itself is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “HO to Wong Cell”.
 ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、上記所定時間を計測するために、タイマを用いる。これにより、無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートを受信した場合において、自己の”Too Late HO”によってRLFが発生したのか、無線基地局装置101Aの”HO to Wrong Cell”によってRLFが発生したのかを判別することができる。 Here, the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. Thereby, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “HO to Wong Cell” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
 ここでは、図8に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、仮想セルCBVおよびセルCAの重複領域へ移動した場合(ステップS110)を想定する。仮想セルCBVは、無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバを促進するために、パラメータであるオフセットOSTに従ってセルCBから拡大された仮想的なセルである。この場合、オフセットOSTは、無線基地局装置101Aの保持するパラメータである。 Here, as shown in FIG. 8, when the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202 moves to the overlapping area of the virtual cell CBV and the cell CA ( Assume step S110). The virtual cell CBV is a virtual cell expanded from the cell CB in accordance with the offset OST that is a parameter in order to promote handover from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio base station apparatus 101B. In this case, the offset OST is a parameter held by the radio base station apparatus 101A.
 図8および図9を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定し、測定した受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS111)。 Referring to FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power to radio base station. Transmit to the station apparatus 101A (step S111).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきか否かを判断する。無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS112)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. When it is determined that the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be handed over, the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S112).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、基地局間インタフェースであるX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS113)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S113).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答をX2インタフェース経由で送信する(ステップS114)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S114).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS115)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S115).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS116)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S116).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS117)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S117).
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202のセルCBにおける滞在時間を計測するために、タイマをスタートさせる(ステップS118)。 Further, the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the staying time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S118).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を解放する(ステップS119)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S119).
 以上により、無線端末装置202の無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバが完了する(ステップS120)。 As described above, the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S120).
 ここで、無線端末装置202が、測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する前に、セルCBの圏外、かつ仮想セルCBVおよびセルCCの圏内に移動する(ステップS121)。 Here, before transmitting the measurement result notification (Measurement Report) to the radio base station apparatus 101B, the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves out of the cell CB and into the virtual cell CBV and the cell CC (step S121).
 そうすると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101C(Other eNB)から送信される無線信号の干渉が大きく、無線基地局装置101Bと通信できなくなることから、RLFが発生してしまう(ステップS123)。 Then, the radio terminal device 202 has a large interference of radio signals transmitted from the radio base station device 101C (Other eNB), and cannot communicate with the radio base station device 101B, so that RLF occurs (step S123). .
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RLF発生を検出すると、無線信号の受信電力の測定等によって周辺の無線基地局装置の探索を行なう。この場合、無線基地局装置101Cからの無線信号の受信電力が最大となることから、無線端末装置202は、探索した無線基地局装置101Cに再接続するために、RRCコネクション再確立要求(RRC Connection Reestablishment Request)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS124)。 Next, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 detects the occurrence of RLF, the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for nearby radio base station apparatuses by measuring the reception power of radio signals or the like. In this case, since the reception power of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101C is maximized, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection) in order to reconnect to the searched radio base station apparatus 101C. Reestablishment Request) is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S124).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、当該無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を保持していないことから、当該無線端末装置202からのRRCコネクション再確立要求を受け入れることができず(ステップS125)、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を当該無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS126)。 Next, since the wireless base station device 101C does not hold information (UE Context) regarding the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101C cannot accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S125). ), RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S126).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を無線基地局装置101Cから受信して、無線基地局装置101Cと通常の接続手順をスタートさせる(ステップS127)。 Next, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S127).
 すなわち、まず、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション要求(RRC Connection Request)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS128)。 That is, first, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101C (step S128).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション要求を受信して、RRCコネクション情報(RRC Connection Setup)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS129)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S129).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101CからRRCコネクション情報を受信して、RRCコネクション完了通知(RRC Connection Setup Complete)を送信する(ステップS130)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S130).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション完了通知を受信して、セキュリティ情報(Security Mode Command)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS131)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S131).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Cからセキュリティ情報を受信して、セキュリティ完了通知(Security Mode Complete)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS132)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C (step S132).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS133)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S133).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101C間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101CへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS134)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101C, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C. (Step S134).
 ここで、RRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知は、たとえば”rlf-InfoAvailable”というパラメータを含む。無線端末装置202は、このパラメータを設定してRRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Cは、当該無線端末装置202についてRLFの発生があったことを認識する。無線基地局装置101Cは、RLFの詳細な情報を取得するため、端末情報要求(UE Information Request)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS135)。 Here, the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”. The wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101C recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202. The wireless base station device 101C transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S135).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報要求を受信して、RLFレポートを含む端末情報応答(UE Information Response)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS136)。RLFレポートは、RLFの発生した無線基地局装置のPCI、RRCコネクション再確立の発生した無線基地局装置のPCIおよびECGIならびに自己の無線端末装置202のC-RNTIを含む。ここでは、RLF発生のPCIは無線基地局装置101BのIDであり、RRCコネクション再確立発生のPCIおよびECGIは無線基地局装置101CのIDであり、C-RNTIは無線基地局装置101Bが付与したIDである。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives a terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including an RLF report to the wireless base station device 101C (step S136). The RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B, the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101C, and the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202から受信したRLFレポートのPCIを参照することにより、無線基地局装置101BにおいてRLFが発生しことを認識し、セルCCへの”Too Late HO”が発生したと判断する(ステップS137)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C recognizes that RLF has occurred in the wireless base station device 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the wireless terminal device 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CC. "Is generated (step S137).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、”Too Late HO”であることを通知するために、当該RLFレポートの内容を含むRLF通知(RLF INDICATION)をX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS138)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S138).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101CからRLF通知を受信すると、スタートさせておいたタイマを確認し、タイマが動作している場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから所定時間経過していない場合には、セルCCへの”Too Late HO”ではないと判断し、さらに、無線基地局装置101A以外の無線基地局装置101CからRLF通知を受信したことから、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”ではなく、セルCBへの”HO to Wrong Cell”であると判断する。なお、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101CからRLF通知を受信したときにタイマが動作していない場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから上記所定時間経過している場合には、セルCCへの”Too Late HO”であると判断する。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined that it is not “Too Late HO” to the cell CC, and further, the RLF notification is received from the radio base station device 101C other than the radio base station device 101A. It is determined that it is not “Too Early HO” but “HO to Wron Cell” to the cell CB. When the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CC It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
 無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBへの”HO to Wrong Cell”であると判断すると(ステップS139)、ハンドオーバレポートを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS140)。このハンドオーバレポートは、たとえば”Handover Report Type”というパラメータを含む。無線基地局装置101Bは、このパラメータを所定値に設定することにより、”HO to Wrong Cell”を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 If the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “HO to Wong Cell” to the cell CB (step S139), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S140). This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”. The radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “HO to Wong Cell” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから当該ハンドオーバレポートを受信して、セルCBへの”HO to Wrong Cell”が発生したことを認識し(ステップS141)、”HO to Wrong Cell”の発生が抑制されるように、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化処理を実行する(ステップS142)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “HO to Wong Cell” has occurred to the cell CB (step S141), and performs “HO to Wong”. The optimization process of the handover operation is executed so that the occurrence of “Cell” is suppressed (step S142).
 以上のような”Too Late HO”、”Too Early HO”および”HO to Wrong Cell”の他に、不適切なハンドオーバ動作として”Ping Pong HO”がある。 In addition to “Too Late HO”, “Too Early HO”, and “HO to Wong Cell” as described above, there is “Ping Pong HO” as an inappropriate handover operation.
 これは、ある無線端末装置について、2つの無線基地局装置が互いに他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバを判断する場合である。この”Ping Pong HO”が発生すると、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の接続が切断されることはないが、当該無線端末装置についてはハンドオーバ動作のための処理が繰り返され、通話およびデータ通信を行なうことができなくなり、また、上位ネットワーク側の負荷が増大してしまう。 This is a case where two radio base station apparatuses determine a handover to another radio base station apparatus for a certain radio terminal apparatus. When this “Ping Pong HO” occurs, the connection between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device will not be cut off, but the processing for the handover operation is repeated for the wireless terminal device, and communication and data communication are performed. Cannot be performed, and the load on the upper network side increases.
 [ハンドオーバ動作の制御パラメータ]
 図10は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、無線端末装置の受信品質のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。
[Control parameters for handover operation]
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a reception quality simulation result of the wireless terminal device in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図10は、無線端末装置202が、時速30kmでピコ基地局付近を通過し、マクロ基地局付近を通過するまでの100秒間における無線端末装置202のRSSI(Received Signal Strength Indication)を示している。 FIG. 10 shows an RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) of the wireless terminal device 202 for 100 seconds until the wireless terminal device 202 passes near the pico base station at a speed of 30 km per hour and passes near the macro base station.
 図10において、グラフG1およびG3は、マクロ基地局から送信される無線信号のRSSIを示し、グラフG2およびG4は、ピコ基地局から送信される無線信号のRSSIを示している。また、グラフG1およびG2は、シャドウィング、すなわち無線端末装置202および他の物体間の相対的な位置変化に起因する、当該無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力の時間的な変化を考慮したシミュレーション結果であり、グラフG3およびG4は、シャドウィングを考慮しないシミュレーション結果である。 10, graphs G1 and G3 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the macro base station, and graphs G2 and G4 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the pico base station. The graphs G1 and G2 take into account the temporal change in the received power of the radio signal in the radio terminal device 202 caused by shadowing, that is, the relative position change between the radio terminal device 202 and other objects. Simulation results, and graphs G3 and G4 are simulation results that do not consider shadowing.
 図10を参照して、無線端末装置202のピコ基地局からマクロ基地局へのハンドオーバの理想位置は、グラフの交点付近すなわち移動時間が約17秒となる位置である。しかしながら、実際には、無線端末装置202の未来の通信環境を無線通信システムにおいて把握することは困難であるため、各種測定結果等に基づいてハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを調整することにより、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化を図ることが重要である。 Referring to FIG. 10, the ideal position for handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the pico base station to the macro base station is the vicinity of the intersection of the graph, that is, the position where the movement time is about 17 seconds. However, in practice, it is difficult to grasp the future communication environment of the wireless terminal device 202 in the wireless communication system. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the handover operation by adjusting the timing of the handover operation based on various measurement results. It is important to make it easier.
 また、移動時間が15秒から20秒の期間では、各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の強弱が入り組んでいるため、たとえば”Too Early HO”または”Ping Pong HO”が発生しやすくなる。また、移動時間が20秒となるタイミング付近では、ピコ基地局からの無線信号の受信電力が急に小さくなり、マクロ基地局からの無線信号の受信電力が急に大きくなり、SINR(Signal to Interference-plus-Noise Ratio)が急激に悪化するため、”Too Late HO”が発生しやすくなる。 In addition, since the radio signal from each radio base station apparatus is intricate in the travel time of 15 to 20 seconds, for example, “Too Early HO” or “Ping Pong HO” is likely to occur. Also, near the timing when the travel time is 20 seconds, the reception power of the radio signal from the pico base station suddenly decreases, the reception power of the radio signal from the macro base station suddenly increases, and SINR (Signal to Interference) Since “-plus-Noise Ratio” deteriorates rapidly, “Too Late HO” is likely to occur.
 ここで、3GPPで規定されたハンドオーバの最適化を図るMRO(Mobility Robustness Optimization)の評価関数をY=MRO(X)とすると、Yは、たとえば”Too Late HO”の発生頻度、”Too Early HO”の発生頻度、”HO to Wrong Cell”の発生頻度、”Ping Pong HO”等の不必要なハンドオーバの発生頻度、またはRRCコネクション情報を送信した直後すなわち無線端末装置202が無線基地局装置に接続された直後のハンドオーバの発生頻度である。 Here, if the evaluation function of MRO (Mobility Robustness Optimization) that optimizes handover specified in 3GPP is Y = MRO (X), Y is, for example, the occurrence frequency of “Too Late HO”, “Too Early HO” “Occurrence frequency”, “HO to Wong Cell” occurrence frequency, “Ping Pong HO” unnecessary handover occurrence frequency, etc. Immediately after transmitting the RRC connection information, that is, the radio terminal device 202 connects to the radio base station device This is the frequency of occurrence of handover immediately after being performed.
 また、たとえば、Xは、電力測定処理(Measurement)用のパラメータであり、ヒステリシスHS:0dB~+15dB、TTT(Time to Trigger):0ms~5120ms、またはオフセットOST(Cell Individual Offset):-24dB~+24dBである。あるいは、Xは、セル再選択処理用のパラメータである。 In addition, for example, X is a parameter for power measurement processing (Measurement), hysteresis HS: 0 dB to +15 dB, TTT (Time to Trigger): 0 ms to 5120 ms, or offset OST (Cell Individual Offset): −24 dB to +24 dB It is. Alternatively, X is a parameter for cell reselection processing.
 たとえば、ヒステリシスHSおよびTTTは後述するイベントごとに設定可能であり、オフセットOSTはサービング基地局の形成するサービングセル、および周辺セルごとに設定可能である。 For example, hysteresis HS and TTT can be set for each event described later, and offset OST can be set for each serving cell formed by the serving base station and each neighboring cell.
 ここでは、無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置202の上り送信負荷を軽減するために、測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を受信するとハンドオーバの判断を行なうものとする。すなわち、測定結果通知の送信タイミングとハンドオーバのタイミングとが対応するものとする。 Here, it is assumed that, in order to reduce the uplink transmission load of the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device determines handover when receiving a measurement result notification (Measurement Report). That is, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification corresponds to the handover timing.
 以下、測定結果通知を送信する各種イベントと電力測定処理のパラメータとの関係について説明する。 Hereinafter, the relationship between various events for transmitting the measurement result notification and the parameters of the power measurement process will be described.
 図11は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA1を示す図である。図11において、横軸は時間であり、縦軸は無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力またはSINRであり、SVCはサービングセルの受信電力またはSINRすなわちサービング基地局が送信する無線信号の受信電力またはSINRである。 FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an event A1 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 11, the horizontal axis is time, the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202, and the SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, that is, the reception power of the radio signal transmitted by the serving base station or SINR.
 図11を参照して、イベントA1では、閾値Thに対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。 Referring to FIG. 11, at event A1, hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
 無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th+HS)よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT1)。 When the received power or SINR of the serving cell becomes larger than (Th + HS), the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T1).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、受信電力またはSINRが(Th-HS)よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT1からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT2)。 Then, when TTT elapses from timing T1 in a state where the condition that the received power or SINR is greater than (Th-HS) is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T2).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT2からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT3)。 Next, when TTT elapses from timing T2 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T3).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT3からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT4)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T3, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T4).
 ここで、無線端末装置202は、レポートオン状態およびレポートオフ状態間の遷移とは無関係に、たとえば周期的に電力測定処理を行なっており、直近の測定結果を測定結果通知として送信する。また、たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力およびSINRの各々について独立にレポートオン状態およびレポートオフ状態間の遷移を行なう。すなわち、無線端末装置202は、受信電力およびSINRの一方について条件を満たせば、測定結果通知を送信する。 Here, the wireless terminal device 202 performs a power measurement process periodically, for example, regardless of the transition between the report-on state and the report-off state, and transmits the latest measurement result as a measurement result notification. Further, for example, radio terminal apparatus 202 performs transition between the report-on state and the report-off state independently for each of received power and SINR. That is, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification if a condition is satisfied for one of the received power and SINR.
 図12は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA2を示す図である。図の見方は図11と同様である。 FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図12を参照して、イベントA2では、閾値Thに対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。 Referring to FIG. 12, at event A2, hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
 無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th-HS)よりも小さくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT11)。 When the received power or SINR of the serving cell becomes smaller than (Th-HS), the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T11).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、受信電力またはSINRが(Th+HS)よりも小さい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT11からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT12)。 The wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T11 in a state where the condition that the received power or SINR is smaller than (Th + HS) is satisfied (timing T12).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT12からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT13)。 Next, when TTT has elapsed from timing T12 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T13).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT13からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT14)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T13, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T14).
 図13は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA3を示す図である。図13において、横軸は時間であり、縦軸は無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力またはSINRであり、SVCはサービングセルの受信電力またはSINRであり、NBCは周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRすなわち周辺基地局が送信する無線信号の受信電力またはSINRである。 FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an event A3 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 13, the horizontal axis is time, the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202, SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, and NBC is the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, that is, This is the reception power or SINR of a radio signal transmitted by a neighboring base station.
 図13を参照して、イベントA3では、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOST1が正方向に設定されており、さらに、正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。また、周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOST2が正方向に設定される。 Referring to FIG. 13, at event A3, offset OST1 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, and hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions. Also, the offset OST2 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells.
 無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST2}が{(サービングセルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST1+HS}よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT21)。 The wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report-on state when {(reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST2} becomes larger than {(reception power or SINR of the serving cell) + OST1 + HS} (timing T21).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST2}が{(サービングセルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST1-HS}よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT21からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT22)。 Then, the wireless terminal device 202 performs the processing from the timing T21 to the TTT in a state where {(neighboring cell received power or SINR) + OST2} is larger than {(serving cell received power or SINR) + OST1-HS}. When the time has elapsed, a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T22).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT22からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT23)。 Next, when TTT has elapsed from timing T22 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T23).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT23からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT24)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T23, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T24).
 図14は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA4を示す図である。図の見方は図13と同様である。 FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an event A4 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図14を参照して、イベントA4では、周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOSTが正方向に設定されており、閾値Thに対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。 Referring to FIG. 14, at event A4, the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells, and the hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to the threshold Th.
 無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th+HS)よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT31)。 Wireless terminal apparatus 202 transitions to a report-on state when {(reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST} is greater than (Th + HS) (timing T31).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th-HS)よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT31からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT32)。 Then, wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T31 while the condition that {(reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST} is larger than (Th−HS) is satisfied. (Timing T32).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT32からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT33)。 Next, when TTT has elapsed from timing T32 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T33).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT33からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT34)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T33, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T34).
 図15は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA5を示す図である。図の見方は図13と同様である。 FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an event A5 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図15を参照して、イベントA5では、周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOSTが正方向に設定されており、閾値Th1に対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHS1が設定されており、閾値Th2に対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHS2が設定される。 Referring to FIG. 15, at event A5, the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, and the hysteresis HS1 is set in the positive and negative direction with respect to the threshold Th1. Hysteresis HS2 is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to Th2.
 無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th1-HS1)よりも小さくなり、かつ{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th2+HS2)よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT41)。 When the received power or SINR of the serving cell becomes smaller than (Th1-HS1) and {(reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST} becomes larger than (Th2 + HS2), the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state. (Timing T41).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th1+HS1)よりも小さく、かつ{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th2-HS2)よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT41からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT42)。 Radio terminal 202 satisfies the condition that the reception power or SINR of the serving cell is smaller than (Th1 + HS1) and {(reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST} is larger than (Th2-HS2). When TTT elapses from timing T41 in a state where it is in a state, a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T42).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT42からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT43)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T42, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T43).
 以上のように、イベントA1~A5で説明したパラメータ、すなわちヒステリシスHS、TTTおよびオフセットOSTを調整すれば、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを制御することが可能である。 As described above, the timing of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 can be controlled by adjusting the parameters described in the events A1 to A5, that is, the hysteresis HS, TTT, and the offset OST.
 図16は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ヒステリシスHSの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。図16は、イベントA3の場合を示す。 FIG. 16 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the hysteresis HS in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 shows the case of event A3.
 図16を参照して、ヒステリシスHSをゼロに設定した場合には、タイミングT51においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT53において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT55においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 Referring to FIG. 16, when hysteresis HS is set to zero, a transition is made to the report on state at timing T51, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T53, and a transition to the report off state is made at timing T55.
 これに対して、ヒステリシスHSをゼロより大きく設定した場合には、タイミングT51より後のタイミングT52においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT53より後のタイミングT54において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT55より後のタイミングT56においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 On the other hand, when the hysteresis HS is set larger than zero, the state transits to the report-on state at timing T52 after timing T51, the measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T54 after timing T53, and timing T55. At a later timing T56, the state transits to the report off state.
 すなわち、ヒステリシスHSを大きくすると、測定結果通知の送信タイミングすなわちハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを遅くすることができる。 That is, when the hysteresis HS is increased, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification, that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
 図17は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、TTTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。図17は、イベントA3の場合を示す。 FIG. 17 is a diagram showing timing control of the handover operation by adjusting the TTT in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 shows the case of event A3.
 図17を参照して、TTTを小さく設定した場合には、タイミングT62において測定結果通知が送信される。 Referring to FIG. 17, when TTT is set to be small, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T62.
 これに対して、TTTを大きく設定した場合には、タイミングT61より後のタイミングT63において測定結果通知が送信される。 On the other hand, when TTT is set large, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T63 after timing T61.
 すなわち、TTTを大きくすると、測定結果通知の送信タイミングすなわちハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを遅くすることができる。 That is, when the TTT is increased, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification, that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
 図18は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、オフセットOSTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。図18は、イベントA3の場合を示す。 FIG. 18 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 18 shows the case of event A3.
 図18を参照して、オフセットOSTをゼロに設定した場合には、タイミングT71においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT73において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT76においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 Referring to FIG. 18, when the offset OST is set to zero, a transition is made to the report on state at timing T71, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T73, and a transition to the report off state is made at timing T76.
 これに対して、オフセットOSTをゼロより小さく設定した場合には、タイミングT71より後のタイミングT72においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT73より後のタイミングT74において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT76より前のタイミングT75においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 On the other hand, when the offset OST is set to be smaller than zero, a transition is made to the report-on state at timing T72 after timing T71, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T74 after timing T73, and timing T76. Transition to the report-off state at an earlier timing T75.
 すなわち、オフセットOSTを小さくすると、測定結果通知の送信タイミングすなわちハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを遅くすることができる。また、レポートオフ状態からレポートオン状態への遷移が遅くなり、かつレポートオン状態からレポートオフ状態への遷移が早くなる。 That is, if the offset OST is reduced, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification, that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed. Further, the transition from the report off state to the report on state is delayed, and the transition from the report on state to the report off state is accelerated.
 以上のように、ヒステリシスHSを大きくするか、TTTを大きくするか、あるいはオフセットOSTを小さくすることにより、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが遅くなる。すなわち、無線端末装置202がサービング基地局に接続される時間が長くなることから、”Too Early HO”、”HO to Wrong Cell”および”Ping Pong HO”の発生頻度が減り、”Too Late HO”の発生頻度が増えることになる。 As described above, the timing of the handover operation is delayed by increasing the hysteresis HS, increasing the TTT, or decreasing the offset OST. That is, since the time for which the wireless terminal device 202 is connected to the serving base station becomes longer, the occurrence frequency of “Too Early HO”, “HO to Wong Cell” and “Ping Pong HO” is reduced, and “Too Late HO” The frequency of occurrence will increase.
 ここで、ヒステリシスHS、TTTおよびオフセットOSTを調整する効果の違いについて考察する。 Here, the difference in the effect of adjusting the hysteresis HS, TTT and offset OST will be considered.
 いずれのパラメータを調整しても、ハンドオーバのタイミングを調整することができるが、これらの効果は、干渉を含む地形、および無線端末装置の移動速度等によって異なる。 The handover timing can be adjusted by adjusting any of the parameters, but these effects differ depending on the topography including interference, the moving speed of the wireless terminal device, and the like.
 ヒステリシスHSおよびオフセットOSTを調整することは、セルを仮想的に大きくしたり小さくしたりして、ハンドオーバの行なわれる位置を調整することに相当する。たとえば、サービングセルのヒステリシスHSを大きくすることにより、無線信号の受信電力を大きく見せて、他セルへのハンドオーバが行なわれにくくする。また、周辺セルのオフセットOSTを負の値に設定することにより、周辺セルからの無線信号の受信電力を小さく見せて、他セルへのハンドオーバが行なわれにくくする。 Adjusting the hysteresis HS and the offset OST corresponds to adjusting the position where the handover is performed by virtually increasing or decreasing the cell. For example, by increasing the hysteresis HS of the serving cell, the received power of the radio signal is increased and the handover to another cell is difficult to be performed. Also, by setting the offset OST of the neighboring cell to a negative value, the received power of the radio signal from the neighboring cell appears to be small, and handover to another cell is difficult to be performed.
 また、ヒステリシスHSおよびオフセットOSTは、無線端末装置の移動速度による影響を受けにくいパラメータである。 Further, the hysteresis HS and the offset OST are parameters that are not easily influenced by the moving speed of the wireless terminal device.
 ここで、無線基地局装置から無線端末装置202へ送信される測定開始要求(Measurement Configuration)およびRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)には、たとえば、周辺セルごとにオフセットOSTが設定され、イベントA1~A5のうちの少なくとも1つが設定され、設定イベントに対応するヒステリシスHSおよびTTTが設定される。 Here, in the measurement start request (Measurement Configuration) and the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) transmitted from the radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus 202, for example, an offset OST is set for each neighboring cell, and the event At least one of A1 to A5 is set, and hysteresis HS and TTT corresponding to the set event are set.
 [無線基地局装置]
 図19は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の構成を示す図である。
[Radio base station equipment]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図19を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを備える。信号処理部95は、受信信号処理部96と、送信信号処理部97とを含む。信号処理部95および制御部98は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)またはDSP(Digital Signal Processor)等によって実現される。 Referring to FIG. 19, the radio base station apparatus 101 includes an antenna 91, a circulator 92, a radio reception unit 93, a radio transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control unit 98. The signal processing unit 95 includes a reception signal processing unit 96 and a transmission signal processing unit 97. The signal processing unit 95 and the control unit 98 are realized by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
 サーキュレータ92は、アンテナ91において受信された無線端末装置202からの無線信号を無線受信部93へ出力し、また、無線送信部94から受けた無線信号をアンテナ91へ出力する。 The circulator 92 outputs the radio signal from the radio terminal device 202 received by the antenna 91 to the radio reception unit 93 and outputs the radio signal received from the radio transmission unit 94 to the antenna 91.
 無線受信部93は、サーキュレータ92から受けた無線信号をベースバンド信号またはIF(Intermediate Frequency)信号に周波数変換し、この周波数変換した信号をデジタル信号に変換して受信信号処理部96へ出力する。 The radio reception unit 93 converts the frequency of the radio signal received from the circulator 92 into a baseband signal or IF (Intermediate Frequency) signal, converts the frequency-converted signal into a digital signal, and outputs the digital signal to the reception signal processing unit 96.
 受信信号処理部96は、無線受信部93から受けたデジタル信号に対してCDMA(Code Division Multiple Access)方式における逆拡散等の信号処理を行ない、この信号処理後のデジタル信号の一部または全部を所定のフレームフォーマットに変換してコアネットワーク側へ送信する。 The reception signal processing unit 96 performs signal processing such as despreading in the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the digital signal received from the wireless reception unit 93, and performs part or all of the digital signal after this signal processing. The data is converted into a predetermined frame format and transmitted to the core network side.
 送信信号処理部97は、コアネットワーク側から受信した通信データを所定のフレームフォーマットに変換した通信データまたは自ら生成した通信データに対してOFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex)方式におけるIFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)等の信号処理を行ない、この信号処理後のデジタル信号を無線送信部94へ出力する。 The transmission signal processing unit 97 uses IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) in the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for communication data obtained by converting communication data received from the core network side into a predetermined frame format or communication data generated by itself. The digital signal after the signal processing is output to the wireless transmission unit 94.
 無線送信部94は、送信信号処理部97から受けたデジタル信号をアナログ信号に変換し、変換したアナログ信号を無線信号に周波数変換してサーキュレータ92へ出力する。 The wireless transmission unit 94 converts the digital signal received from the transmission signal processing unit 97 into an analog signal, converts the frequency of the converted analog signal into a wireless signal, and outputs the converted signal to the circulator 92.
 制御部98は、無線基地局装置101における各ユニットおよびコアネットワークとの間で各種情報をやり取りする。 The control unit 98 exchanges various types of information with each unit and the core network in the radio base station apparatus 101.
 図3~図9では、不適切なハンドオーバ動作およびその検出処理について説明した。不適切なハンドオーバ動作を検出した場合、前述のように無線基地局装置は、ヒステリシスHS、オフセットOSTおよびTTT等のパラメータを調整することにより、ハンドオーバ動作を最適化する。 In FIGS. 3 to 9, an inappropriate handover operation and its detection processing have been described. When an inappropriate handover operation is detected, the radio base station apparatus optimizes the handover operation by adjusting parameters such as hysteresis HS, offset OST, and TTT as described above.
 しかしながら、たとえば”Too Late HO”と”Too Early HO”とは相反する事象であり、パラメータの調整についてトレードオフの関係にあるため、バランスよく調整することが困難な場合もある。このようなパラメータ調整の代わりに、あるいはパラメータ調整に加えて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制する手法が望まれる。 However, for example, “Too Late HO” and “Too Early HO” are contradictory events, and there is a trade-off relationship with respect to parameter adjustment, so it may be difficult to adjust in a balanced manner. Instead of such parameter adjustment or in addition to parameter adjustment, a technique for suppressing an inappropriate handover operation is desired.
 図2では、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を説明した。このシーケンスにおいて、無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ動作を行なうべきであると判断する元となる測定結果通知を無線端末装置202が送信してから、コアネットワーク側の準備処理すなわち無線基地局装置101Aと上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bとの各種情報のやり取りが行われ、その後無線基地局装置101Aが無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する処理を行なうまでの準備期間T101を考える。図2に示すシーケンスでは、準備期間T101において無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化すると、”Too Late HO”が発生する可能性がある。特に、コアネットワーク側の準備処理では、一般の通信回線を経由して情報が送受信される場合が多いことから、当該準備処理の完了までに長時間を要し、準備期間T101が大幅に長くなる可能性がある。 FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In this sequence, after the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification from which the wireless base station device 101A determines that the handover operation should be performed, a preparation process on the core network side, that is, the wireless base station device 101A Consider a preparation period T101 until various information is exchanged between the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and then the radio base station apparatus 101A performs a process of transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202. In the sequence shown in FIG. 2, when the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 deteriorates during the preparation period T101, “Too Late HO” may occur. In particular, in the preparation process on the core network side, information is often transmitted and received via a general communication line. Therefore, it takes a long time to complete the preparation process, and the preparation period T101 is significantly increased. there is a possibility.
 そこで、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムでは、以下のような構成により、”Too Late HO”を効果的に抑制する。 Therefore, in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention, “Too Late HO” is effectively suppressed by the following configuration.
 図20は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。 FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図20を参照して、制御部98は、ハンドオーバ要求部11と、ハンドオーバ指示部12と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14と、端末測定結果取得部15とを含む。 Referring to FIG. 20, the control unit 98 includes a handover request unit 11, a handover instruction unit 12, a handover condition adjustment unit 13, a handover information acquisition unit 14, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15.
 端末測定結果取得部15は、無線端末装置202からの測定結果通知を取得し、取得した測定結果通知から自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質を求め、当該通信品質をハンドオーバ要求部11およびハンドオーバ指示部12に通知する。 The terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15 acquires the measurement result notification from the wireless terminal device 202, obtains the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 from the acquired measurement result notification, and determines the communication quality. The handover request unit 11 and the handover instruction unit 12 are notified.
 ハンドオーバ要求部11は、自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう、すなわちハンドオーバ要求を他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ要求部11は、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう。 The handover request unit 11 makes a request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device 202 from its own radio base station device 101 to another radio base station device to other radio base station devices, that is, makes a handover request to other radio base station devices. Transmit to the radio base station apparatus. For example, the handover request unit 11 makes the request to another radio base station apparatus when a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied.
 ハンドオーバ指示部12は、上記要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、無線端末装置202に対して自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与える、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示を無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関するハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対して上記指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 In response to the response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request, the handover instruction unit 12 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. That is, an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202. Here, the handover instructing unit 12 receives the above response, and when the handover execution condition regarding the communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is not satisfied, Cancel or suspend giving instructions. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instructing unit 12 does not give the above instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and notifies other wireless base station devices to stop the handover operation. To do.
 なお、図20において破線で囲まれた構成要素、すなわち、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14および端末測定結果取得部15は、本発明において必須の構成要素ではない。無線基地局装置101は、これらの構成要素を備えなくても、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図るという本発明の目的を達成することが可能である。 Note that the components surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 20, that is, the handover condition adjusting unit 13, the handover information acquiring unit 14, and the terminal measurement result acquiring unit 15 are not essential components in the present invention. Even if the radio base station apparatus 101 does not include these components, it is possible to achieve the object of the present invention to stabilize communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus. .
 図21は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ここでは、図1に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、セルCAおよびセルCBの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 1, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
 図21を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己と通信中の無線端末装置202の測定対象となる周波数と、当該周波数の無線信号を送信する他の無線基地局装置とを設定する(ステップS161)。 Referring to FIG. 21, first, radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S161).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、設定した他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信レベルを無線端末装置202に測定させるための測定開始要求を無線端末装置202へ送信する。この測定開始要求には、周辺セル情報、すなわち測定対象となる無線基地局装置のセルIDが含まれる。また、この測定開始要求には、各無線基地局装置の送信周波数が含まれる(ステップS162)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 a measurement start request for causing the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the other wireless base station device that has been set. This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S162).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから測定開始要求を受信して、電力測定処理を開始する、すなわち受信した測定開始要求の示す周波数において、測定開始要求の示す無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定する(ステップS163)。 Next, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives the measurement start request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and starts power measurement processing, that is, the radio base station apparatus indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request. The received power of the radio signal transmitted from is measured (step S163).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、この受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS164)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S164).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する(ステップS165)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S165).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバの準備処理を行なうべきであると判断し、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS166)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S166).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置へ送信する(ステップS167)。 Next, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101B to the higher-level device (step S167).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS168)。 Next, the host device receives the handover request from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station device 101B (step S168).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、上位装置からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、上位装置へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS169)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level apparatus and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level apparatus (Step S169).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS170)。 Next, the host device receives the handover response from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S170).
 以上のような準備処理が実行されている間に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS171)。 While the above preparation process is being performed, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S171).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。このようにして、無線基地局装置101Aは、測定結果通知を受信するたびに上記通信品質を更新する(ステップS172)。 Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S172).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS173)。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus and the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (Step S173).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS174)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S174).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS175)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the higher-level device (step S175).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aから状態通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS176)。 Next, the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S176).
 また、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS177)。 Further, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S177).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、上位装置へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS178)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S178).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS179)。 Next, the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S179).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、上位装置へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS180)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S180).
 図22は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。図22は、ハンドオーバ動作を中止するシーケンスの一例を示す。図22において想定するケースは図21と同様である。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 22 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 22 is the same as FIG.
 図22を参照して、ステップS191~S202の動作は、図21に示すステップS161~S172の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 22, the operations in steps S191 to S202 are the same as the operations in steps S161 to S172 shown in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、最後に取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS203)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus, and executes the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 when the finally acquired communication quality does not satisfy the predetermined handover execution condition. It is determined that the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed should be stopped (step S203).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS204)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S204).
 ここで、無線基地局装置101Aにおいて、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ動作の中止を無線基地局装置101Bに通知する際、自己の無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質が条件を満たしていない旨を上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bに通知する。 Here, in the radio base station apparatus 101A, when the handover instructing unit 12 notifies the radio base station apparatus 101B that the handover operation is stopped, the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is set as a condition. Notify the upper apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B that it is not satisfied.
 具体的には、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との通信品質が原因でハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を示すフラグをハンドオーバ中止通知において設定し、上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する。 Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and transmits the flag to the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B. To do.
 これにより、上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bは、たとえばハンドオーバ動作に関するパラメータ設定の誤り等によってハンドオーバ動作が中止された事象との区別をつけることができる。このため、上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bにおいて、新たなパラメータ設定処理等の不要な処理の発生を防ぎ、かつハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 Thereby, the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting regarding the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing such as new parameter setting processing from occurring in the higher-level device and the radio base station device 101B, and to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
 上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、必要であれば当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なうとともに、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS205)。 The host apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary, and the radio base station apparatus The handover stop notification is transmitted to 101B (step S205).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なう(ステップS206)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S206).
 図21および図22に示すシーケンスにおける無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質の具体例として、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、イベントA3の条件式を利用して、ハンドオーバ実行条件およびハンドオーバ準備条件を設定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、以下の式を満たす場合にハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST1+ヒステリシスHS)<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST2)
As a specific example of the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the sequences shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the conditional expression of event A3 to Set the preparation conditions. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines execution of the handover operation when the following expression is satisfied.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 of neighboring cell)
 また、無線基地局装置101は、以下の式を満たす場合に、ハンドオーバ動作の準備開始を判断する。ただし、制御値Pはゼロ以上の値である。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST1+ヒステリシスHS)<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST2+制御値P)
Also, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines the start of preparation for handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. However, the control value P is a value of zero or more.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 + of neighboring cell + control value P)
 この式において、制御値Pを大きくすることにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備開始タイミングが早くなる。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の実行タイミングを早め、”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。 In this equation, by increasing the control value P, the preparation start timing for the handover operation is advanced. Thereby, the execution timing of the handover operation can be advanced, and “Too Late HO” can be suppressed.
 ただし、制御値Pを大きくしすぎると、ハンドオーバ動作が実行されずに当該ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が無駄になる場合が増える。このような場合には、制御値Pを小さくすることにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備開始タイミングがハンドオーバ動作の実行タイミングに近づくことになり、無駄な準備処理が行われる可能性を低くすることができる。 However, if the control value P is increased too much, the handover operation is not executed and the case where the preparation process for the handover operation is wasted increases. In such a case, by reducing the control value P, the preparation start timing of the handover operation approaches the execution timing of the handover operation, and the possibility that unnecessary preparation processing is performed can be reduced.
 また、制御値Pを正の値に設定すると、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質となる。すなわち、ハンドオーバ準備条件は、ハンドオーバ実行条件と比べて、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう必要性の低い条件となる。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理開始時と比べて、上位装置からのハンドオーバ指示の受信時において把握している最新の通信品質が制御値P相当分以上劣化している場合に、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。すなわち、制御値Pを正の値に設定する場合、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができるため、無線端末装置202の電波環境の変化に対して迅速にハンドオーバ動作を実行することが可能となる。 Also, when the control value P is set to a positive value, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition. That is, the handover preparation condition is a condition where it is less necessary to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202 as compared with the handover execution condition. In this case, in the radio base station apparatus 101A, the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the higher-level apparatus is deteriorated by the amount corresponding to the control value P or more compared with the time when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. In this case, it is determined that a handover operation should be executed. That is, when the control value P is set to a positive value, the preparatory process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the criterion for determining whether to execute the handover operation. It becomes possible to quickly execute a handover operation in response to an environmental change.
 また、制御値Pをゼロに設定すると、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と同等となる。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理開始時と比べて、上位装置からのハンドオーバ指示の受信時において把握している最新の通信品質が良好になっている場合に、ハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する。すなわち、制御値Pをゼロに設定する場合、無線端末装置202の電波環境の好転によって行なう必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することが可能となる。 Further, when the control value P is set to zero, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition. In this case, the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover operation when the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the host apparatus is better than when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. It is determined that should be stopped. That is, when the control value P is set to zero, the handover operation that is no longer necessary due to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be appropriately stopped.
 また、無線基地局装置101において、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質およびハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整可能である。 In the radio base station apparatus 101, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 can adjust the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
 たとえば、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14は、ハンドオーバ指示部12によってハンドオーバ動作の中止が他の無線基地局装置に通知された回数を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14によって取得された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 For example, the handover information acquisition unit 14 acquires the number of times that the handover instruction unit 12 has notified the cancellation of the handover operation to another radio base station apparatus. Then, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 14.
 あるいは、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14は、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作が不適切であった回数を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14によって取得された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 Alternatively, the handover information acquisition unit 14 acquires the number of times that the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device 202 is inappropriate. Then, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 14.
 具体的には、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、以下のような式に従って制御値Pを調整する。ただし、W1およびW2は重み付け係数であり、それぞれ正の値および負の値である。
P=W1×”Too Late HO”の回数+W2×無駄な準備処理が行われた回数(ハンドオーバ動作の中止回数)
Specifically, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the control value P according to the following equation. However, W1 and W2 are weighting coefficients, and are a positive value and a negative value, respectively.
P = W1 × “Too Late HO” number of times + W2 × number of times of useless preparation processing (number of times of handover operation cancellation)
 なお、上記各回数は、ある無線基地局装置において、1つの他の無線基地局装置についての回数に限らず、複数の他の無線基地局装置についての合計回数とすることも可能である。 It should be noted that the number of times described above is not limited to the number of times for one other wireless base station device in a certain wireless base station device, but may be the total number of times for a plurality of other wireless base station devices.
 また、無線基地局装置101は、たとえばCQIレポートの値を通信品質として利用してもよい。 Further, the radio base station apparatus 101 may use, for example, the value of the CQI report as the communication quality.
 CQIレポートは、直接現在の各セルにおける電波状況を通知するものではなく、SINRを用いた以下の式により0~15の16段階で表現される値である。CQI=0の場合、無線端末装置202の受信品質が最も悪く、CQI=15の場合、無線端末装置202の受信品質が最も良い。
CQI=min(max(round((SINR[dB]+8)/1.892),0),15)
The CQI report does not directly notify the current radio wave condition in each cell, but is a value expressed in 16 levels from 0 to 15 by the following formula using SINR. When CQI = 0, the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is the worst, and when CQI = 15, the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is the best.
CQI = min (max (round ((SINR [dB] +8) /1.892), 0), 15)
 また、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けてから、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たすまで待機する構成であってもよい。すなわち、無線基地局装置101において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるまで待機する。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされると無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える。一方、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされる前に通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ中止条件が満たされた場合には、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Further, the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to wait until the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition after receiving a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request. That is, in radio base station apparatus 101, handover instruction unit 12 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus and waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied when the handover execution condition is not satisfied. Then, when the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 12 gives a handover operation instruction to the wireless terminal device 202. On the other hand, if a predetermined handover suspension condition related to communication quality is satisfied before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 12 does not give a handover operation instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and performs the handover operation. Notify other radio base station apparatus to cancel.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後、無線端末装置202からたとえば周期的に到着する測定結果通知に基づいて自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を監視し、当該通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たした時点で、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on a measurement result notification that arrives periodically, for example, from the radio terminal apparatus 202 after completion of the handover operation preparation process. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to perform a handover operation.
 これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の開始タイミングを早めるほど、最適なタイミングでハンドオーバ動作を実行できる可能性が高まる。 As a result, the earlier the start timing of the preparation process for the handover operation, the higher the possibility that the handover operation can be executed at the optimum timing.
 図23は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。図23において想定するケースは図21と同様である。 FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The case assumed in FIG. 23 is the same as that in FIG.
 図23を参照して、ステップS211~S220の動作は、図21に示すステップS161~S170の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 23, the operations in steps S211 to S220 are the same as the operations in steps S161 to S170 shown in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
 ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が実行されている間に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS221)。 While the handover operation preparation process is being performed, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S221).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。このようにして、無線基地局装置101Aは、測定結果通知を受信するたびに上記通信品質を更新する(ステップS222)。 Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S222).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件またはハンドオーバ中止条件を満たすまで待機する(ステップS223)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and waits until the communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition or handover cancellation condition (step S223).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、更新された通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS224)。 Next, if the updated communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S224).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS225)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S225).
 ステップS226~S231の動作は、図21に示すステップS175~S180の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Since operations in steps S226 to S231 are the same as those in steps S175 to S180 shown in FIG. 21, detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
 図24は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。図24は、ハンドオーバ動作を中止するシーケンスの一例を示す。図24において想定するケースは図21と同様である。 FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 24 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 24 is the same as that in FIG.
 図24を参照して、ステップS241~S253の動作は、図23に示すステップS211~S223の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 24, the operations in steps S241 to S253 are the same as the operations in steps S211 to S223 shown in FIG. 23, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、更新された通信品質がハンドオーバ中止条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS254)。 Next, when the updated communication quality satisfies the handover cancel condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, and cancel the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be (step S254).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS255)。 Next, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S255).
 ここで、図22に示すシーケンスと同様に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との通信品質が原因でハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を示すフラグをハンドオーバ中止通知において設定し、上位装置へ送信する。 Here, similarly to the sequence shown in FIG. 22, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and sends it to the host apparatus. Send.
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、必要であれば当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なうとともに、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS256)。 Next, the higher-level apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary. The handover cancellation notification is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101B (step S256).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なう(ステップS257)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S257).
 図23および図24に示すシーケンスにおける無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質の具体例として、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、イベントA3の条件式を利用して、ハンドオーバ中止条件を設定する。すなわち、図22および図23に示すシーケンスにおいて説明したハンドオーバ動作の実行判断および準備開始判断の条件式に加えて、無線基地局装置101は、以下の式を満たす場合にハンドオーバ動作の中止を判断する。ただし、制御値Qは正の値である。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST1+ヒステリシスHS+制御値Q)<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST2)
As a specific example of the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the sequences shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets a handover cancellation condition using the conditional expression of event A3. To do. That is, in addition to the conditional expressions for determining whether to perform handover operation and determining whether to start preparation described with reference to the sequences illustrated in FIGS. 22 and 23, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines to cancel handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. . However, the control value Q is a positive value.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS + control value Q) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 of neighboring cell)
 この式において、制御値Qを正の値に設定すると、ハンドオーバ中止条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質となる。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理開始時と比べて、通信品質が制御値Q相当分以上良くなっている場合に、ハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する。すなわち、制御値Qを正の値に設定する場合、無線端末装置202の電波環境の好転に対して適切にハンドオーバ動作を中止することが可能となる。 In this equation, when the control value Q is set to a positive value, the communication quality indicated by the handover cancellation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition. In this case, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation should be stopped when the communication quality is improved by an amount corresponding to the control value Q or more compared to when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. That is, when the control value Q is set to a positive value, the handover operation can be appropriately stopped with respect to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、制御値Qをゼロに設定すると、ハンドオーバ準備条件およびハンドオーバ中止条件が等しくなり、ハンドオーバの準備処理および中止処理が繰り返されてしまうが、制御値Qを正の値に設定することにより、このような事象の発生を防ぐことができる。 Further, when the control value Q is set to zero, the handover preparation condition and the handover cancellation condition become equal, and the handover preparation process and the cancellation process are repeated. However, by setting the control value Q to a positive value, The occurrence of such an event can be prevented.
 なお、ハンドオーバ中止条件は、通信品質に関する条件である場合に限らず、たとえば経過時間であってもよい。 Note that the handover cancel condition is not limited to a condition related to communication quality, and may be an elapsed time, for example.
 具体的には、図24において、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置へ送信する(ステップS247)前後においてタイマをスタートさせ、タイマの満了をハンドオーバ中止条件とする。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす前にスタートさせておいたタイマが満了すると、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断し、上位装置へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS254)。 Specifically, in FIG. 24, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts a timer before and after transmitting a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the higher-level apparatus (step S247). To do. Then, when the timer started before the handover execution condition expires, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, and cancels the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be, and a handover stop notification is transmitted to the host device (step S254).
 図25は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいてハンドオーバ動作に要する時間の内訳の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a breakdown of time required for the handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図25を参照して、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間は、たとえば無線端末装置202における電力測定処理の間隔に相当する時間T111と、TTTに相当する時間T112と、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間T113と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行時間、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示が送信されてからハンドオーバ完了通知が送信されるまでの時間T114との和である。 Referring to FIG. 25, the time required for the handover operation is, for example, a time T111 corresponding to an interval of power measurement processing in radio terminal apparatus 202, a time T112 corresponding to TTT, a preparation processing time T113 for handover operation, and a handover This is the sum of the operation execution time, that is, the time T114 from when the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
 なお、TTTは、前述のように、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が一定間隔で測定結果通知を送信するための周期である。このため、時間T111および時間T112は重複する場合がある。図25では、説明を簡単にするために、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が最初に送信した測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を示している。 Note that, as described above, TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T111 and time T112 may overlap. FIG. 25 shows a case where the handover operation is performed based on the measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after the transition to the report-on state, in order to simplify the description.
 時間T111は、たとえば200msであり、CQIレポートを利用する場合には5msとなる。また、時間T112は、たとえば0ms~2000msである。また、時間T113は、たとえば50ms~150msである。また、時間T114は、たとえば40msである。 The time T111 is, for example, 200 ms, and 5 ms when using the CQI report. The time T112 is, for example, 0 ms to 2000 ms. The time T113 is, for example, 50 ms to 150 ms. The time T114 is 40 ms, for example.
 時間T111および時間T112については、ヒステリシスHS、オフセットOSTおよびTTT等のパラメータを調整することによって短縮することが可能である。 The time T111 and the time T112 can be shortened by adjusting parameters such as the hysteresis HS, the offset OST, and the TTT.
 そして、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、前述のようにハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の実行判断処理を行なう構成により、時間T113を理想的には0msまで短縮することが可能である。 Then, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, time T113 is ideally reduced to 0 ms by the configuration for performing the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation execution determination process as described above. Is possible.
 すなわち、”Too Late HO”の発生頻度が高く、かつハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを早めるためのパラメータ調整がこれ以上困難な場合に、たとえば前述の制御値Pを大きくする。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理のタイミングを早め、適切なハンドオーバ動作を実現することができる。 That is, when the frequency of occurrence of “Too Late HO” is high and parameter adjustment for advancing the timing of the handover operation is more difficult than this, for example, the control value P described above is increased. Thereby, the timing of the preparation process for the handover operation can be advanced and an appropriate handover operation can be realized.
 ところで、非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。 By the way, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication disconnection and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system.
 これに対して、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ要求部11は、自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう。ハンドオーバ指示部12は、上記要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、無線端末装置202に対して自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与える。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 On the other hand, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 11 performs handover of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. A request for operation is made to another radio base station apparatus. In response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request, the handover instruction unit 12 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. give. When the handover instruction unit 12 receives the above response and the predetermined handover execution condition regarding the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is not satisfied, Cancel or hold the above instructions.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation, so that “Too Late HO” can be suppressed. In addition, unlike the case of adjusting the parameters of the handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO” from increasing. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed.
 したがって、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 Therefore, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 receives the response and performs a predetermined communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202. When the handover execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 is not instructed to perform the handover operation, and notifies the other wireless base station device that the handover operation is to be stopped.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の中止に伴い、たとえば他の無線基地局装置においてハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately release various resources secured for the handover operation in other radio base station apparatuses, for example, when the handover operation is stopped.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、他の無線基地局装置から上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるまで待機する。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされると無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ指示を与える。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 receives the above response from another radio base station apparatus and receives its own radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202. If a predetermined handover execution condition regarding the communication quality is not satisfied, the system waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied. Then, the handover instruction unit 12 gives a handover instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 when the handover execution condition is satisfied.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後、無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たした時点で、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えることができるため、最適なタイミングでハンドオーバ動作を実行することができる。 With such a configuration, after the preparation process for the handover operation is completed, when the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies the handover execution condition, the handover operation is performed on the radio terminal apparatus 202. Since an instruction can be given, a handover operation can be executed at an optimal timing.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるまで待機し、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされる前に通信品質に関するハンドオーバ中止条件が満たされた場合には、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Also, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied, and before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover stop condition regarding the communication quality is set. When the condition is satisfied, a handover instruction is not given to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the other radio base station apparatus is notified that the handover operation is to be stopped.
 このような構成により、タイマの満了等の適切なタイミング、または電波環境に応じた適切な条件でハンドオーバ動作を中止し、ハンドオーバ動作の待機時間の増大を防ぐことができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作の中止に伴い、たとえば他の無線基地局装置においてハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the handover operation at an appropriate timing such as the expiration of the timer or an appropriate condition according to the radio wave environment and prevent an increase in the standby time of the handover operation. Also, with the cancellation of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation in other radio base station apparatuses.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ要求部11は、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ準備条件が満たされる場合に、ハンドオーバ要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう。ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 11 satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition relating to communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202. In this case, a handover request is made to another radio base station apparatus. The communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と同等である。 Also, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備期間において無線端末装置の電波環境が好転し、実行する必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することができるため、不要となったハンドオーバ動作の実行を抑制することができる。 With such a configuration, the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて同等であるかまたは良い品質であり、ハンドオーバ中止条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Also, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equal to or better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition, and the handover is canceled. The communication quality indicated by the condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備期間において無線端末装置の電波環境が好転し、実行する必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することができるため、不要となったハンドオーバ動作の実行を抑制することができる。 With such a configuration, the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ動作の中止を他の無線基地局装置に通知する際、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が条件を満たしていない旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the handover instruction unit 12 notifies other radio base station apparatuses of the cancellation of the handover operation, the handover instruction unit 12 and the radio base station apparatus 101 The other radio base station apparatus is notified that the communication quality between the terminal apparatuses 202 does not satisfy the condition.
 これにより、他の無線基地局装置は、たとえばハンドオーバ動作に関するパラメータ設定の誤り等によってハンドオーバ動作が中止された事象との区別をつけることができる。このため、他の無線基地局装置における新たなパラメータ設定処理等の余計な処理の発生を防ぎ、かつハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 Thereby, the other radio base station apparatus can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting related to the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent occurrence of unnecessary processes such as new parameter setting processes in other radio base station apparatuses and appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質およびハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover condition adjustment unit 13 adjusts the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
 このような構成により、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度、およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度の調整が可能となり、より適切なハンドオーバ動作を実現することができる。 Such a configuration makes it possible to adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of canceling handover operations, thereby realizing more appropriate handover operations.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、ハンドオーバ指示部12によってハンドオーバ動作の中止が他の無線基地局装置に通知された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover condition adjustment unit 13 is based on the number of times that the handover instruction unit 12 notifies the other radio base station apparatus of the cancellation of the handover operation. Adjust the communication quality difference.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度の観点から、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度、およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度を適切に調整することができる。 Such a configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of cancellation of handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of handover operation cancellation.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14は、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作が不適切であった回数を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13は、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14によって取得された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover information acquisition unit 14 performs the handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202. Get the number of times it was inappropriate. Then, the handover condition adjusting unit 13 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 14.
 このような構成により、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度の観点から、不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度を適切に調整することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations and the frequency of canceling handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO”.
 なお、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質として、サービングセルの受信電力および周辺セルの受信電力の関係、あるいはCQIレポートの値を用いる構成であるとしたが、これに限定するものではない。無線端末装置202の受信電力に限らず、パイロット信号の誤り率等、無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質を示す何らかの指標を用いる構成であればよい。また、イベントA3以外のイベントの条件式を利用する構成であってもよい。また、下り方向の通信品質に限らず、上り方向の通信品質を利用する構成であってもよい。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, as the communication quality between radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202, the relationship between the reception power of the serving cell and the reception power of neighboring cells, or the CQI Although the configuration uses report values, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to the received power of the wireless terminal device 202, and any configuration that uses some index indicating communication quality between the wireless base station device and the wireless terminal device, such as an error rate of a pilot signal, may be used. Moreover, the structure using the conditional expression of events other than event A3 may be sufficient. Further, the communication quality is not limited to the downlink communication quality, and may be configured to use the uplink communication quality.
 <シミュレーション>
 本願発明者らは、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の動作についてシミュレーションを行った。以下、本シミュレーションの内容および結果について詳細に説明する。
<Simulation>
The inventors of the present application performed a simulation on the operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Hereinafter, the contents and results of this simulation will be described in detail.
 図26は、シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける無線環境パラメータを示す図である。 FIG. 26 is a diagram showing radio environment parameters in the radio communication system to be simulated.
 図26を参照して、本シミュレーションの対象となる無線通信システムの無線環境パラメータは、「基地局数/セクタ数」、「基地局間距離」、「パスロス」すなわち無線基地局装置が送信する無線信号の送信電力と、無線端末装置における当該無線信号の受信電力との差、「基地局アンテナゲイン」すなわち無指向性を0dBとした場合の指向性によるゲイン、「端末アンテナゲイン」、「シャドウィング」すなわち無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力の時間的な変動量、「シャドウィングの相関距離」すなわちシャドウィングの2地点間の相関が0.5となるときの当該2地点間の距離、「シャドウィングの相関値」、「基地局アンテナ指向性パターン」、「キャリア周波数/帯域」、「基地局の総送信電力」、「アンテナ構成」および「基地局-端末間の最小距離」である。 Referring to FIG. 26, the radio environment parameters of the radio communication system to be the target of this simulation are “number of base stations / number of sectors”, “distance between base stations”, “path loss”, that is, radio transmitted by the radio base station apparatus. The difference between the transmission power of the signal and the reception power of the radio signal in the radio terminal device, the “base station antenna gain”, that is, the gain by directivity when the non-directivity is 0 dB, “terminal antenna gain”, “shadowing” "That is, the amount of time fluctuation of the reception power of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202," the shadowing correlation distance ", that is, the distance between the two points when the correlation between the two points of shadowing is 0.5, “Correlation value of shadowing”, “Base station antenna directivity pattern”, “Carrier frequency / band”, “Total transmission power of base station”, “Ante Configuration "and" base station - the minimum distance "between terminals.
 具体的には、この無線通信システムにおけるマクロ基地局数は19であり、マクロ基地局が3つのセクタを有するものとして総セクタ数は57であり、ピコ基地局数は1であり、ピコ基地局が1つのセクタを有するものとして総セクタ数は1である。マクロ基地局間の距離は500mであり、マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局間の距離は250mである。マクロ基地局についてのパスロスは、マクロ基地局および無線端末装置間の距離をd[m]として15.3+37.6×log10(d)[dB]であり、ピコ基地局についてのパスロスは、ピコ基地局および無線端末装置間の距離をd[m]として30.6+36.7×log10(d)[dB]である。マクロ基地局のアンテナゲインは15dBiであり、ピコ基地局のアンテナゲインは5dBiである。無線端末装置202のアンテナゲインはマクロ基地局およびピコ基地局のいずれにおいても0dBiである。マクロ基地局についてのシャドウィングの標準偏差は8dBであり、ピコ基地局についてのシャドウィングの標準偏差は10dBである。マクロ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相間距離は25mであり、ピコ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相間距離は25mである。マクロ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相関値はセル間で0.5であり、セクタ間で1であり、ピコ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相関値はセル間で0.5である。マクロ基地局のアンテナの指向性パターンは3次元のパターンであり、ピコ基地局のアンテナは無指向性である。マクロ基地局の送信側のキャリア周波数および帯域はそれぞれ2.0GHzおよび10MHzであり、ピコ基地局の送信側のキャリア周波数および帯域はそれぞれ2.0GHzおよび10MHzである。マクロ基地局の総送信電力は46dBmであり、ピコ基地局の総送信電力は30dBmである。マクロ基地局の有する送信アンテナは1本であり、ピコ基地局の有する送信アンテナは1本であり、無線端末装置202の有する受信アンテナは2本である。その他、無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の最小距離等のパラメータは、3GPP TR 36.814に従う。 Specifically, the number of macro base stations in this wireless communication system is 19, the total number of sectors is 57, assuming that the macro base station has three sectors, the number of pico base stations is 1, and the pico base station Has one sector and the total number of sectors is one. The distance between the macro base stations is 500 m, and the distance between the macro base station and the pico base station is 250 m. The path loss for the macro base station is 15.3 + 37.6 × log 10 (d) [dB] where the distance between the macro base station and the wireless terminal device is d [m], and the path loss for the pico base station is pico The distance between the base station and the wireless terminal device is 30.6 + 36.7 × log 10 (d) [dB] where d [m] is the distance. The antenna gain of the macro base station is 15 dBi, and the antenna gain of the pico base station is 5 dBi. The antenna gain of the wireless terminal device 202 is 0 dBi in both the macro base station and the pico base station. The standard deviation of shadowing for the macro base station is 8 dB, and the standard deviation of shadowing for the pico base station is 10 dB. The shadowing interphase distance for the macro base station is 25 m, and the shadowing interphase distance for the pico base station is 25 m. The shadowing correlation value for a macro base station is 0.5 between cells and 1 between sectors, and the shadowing correlation value for a pico base station is 0.5 between cells. The directivity pattern of the macro base station antenna is a three-dimensional pattern, and the pico base station antenna is omnidirectional. The carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the macro base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively, and the carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the pico base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively. The total transmission power of the macro base station is 46 dBm, and the total transmission power of the pico base station is 30 dBm. The macro base station has one transmission antenna, the pico base station has one transmission antenna, and the wireless terminal device 202 has two reception antennas. Other parameters such as the minimum distance between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus conform to 3GPP TR 36.814.
 図27は、シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける電力測定処理(Measurement)のパラメータを示す図である。 FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating parameters of power measurement processing (Measurement) in the wireless communication system to be simulated.
 図27を参照して、本シミュレーションでは、プロファイルとしてセット1~セット5を設けている。セット1からセット5の順番で、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが早くなり、セット5においてハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが最も早くなる。また、電力測定処理のパラメータは、端末移動速度、基地局負荷率、TTT、イベントA3のオフセットOST、電力測定間隔すなわち測定結果通知の更新周期、およびフィルタリング係数αである。 Referring to FIG. 27, in this simulation, set 1 to set 5 are provided as profiles. In the order from set 1 to set 5, the timing of the handover operation is advanced, and in set 5, the timing of the handover operation is the earliest. The parameters of the power measurement process are the terminal moving speed, the base station load factor, TTT, the offset OST of the event A3, the power measurement interval, that is, the measurement result notification update cycle, and the filtering coefficient α.
 ここで、フィルタリング係数αについて説明する。無線端末装置202は、たとえば、時刻(t-1)において測定した受信電力M(t-1)、時刻(t-1)より後の時刻tにおいて測定した受信電力M(t)およびフィルタリング係数αから、以下の式で表される受信電力MR(t)を算出する。
MR(t)=(1-2-α/4)×MR(t-1)+2-α/4×M(t)
Here, the filtering coefficient α will be described. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the received power M (t−1) measured at time (t−1), the received power M (t) measured at time t after time (t−1), and the filtering coefficient α. From this, the received power MR (t) expressed by the following equation is calculated.
MR (t) = (1-2− α / 4 ) × MR (t−1) + 2− α / 4 × M (t)
 無線端末装置202は、受信電力MR(t)を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置へ送信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the received power MR (t) to the wireless base station device.
 フィルタリング係数αを大きくする場合には、より過去の受信電力が測定結果通知に反映されることになるため、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが遅くなる。一方、フィルタリング係数αを小さくする場合には、より最近の受信電力が測定結果通知に反映されることになるため、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが早くなる。 When the filtering coefficient α is increased, the past received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so the timing of the handover operation is delayed. On the other hand, when the filtering coefficient α is reduced, the more recent received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so that the timing of the handover operation is advanced.
 セット1~セット5において、無線端末装置202の移動速度は時速3km,30km,60km,120kmであり、基地局負荷率は100%である。また、セット1において、TTTは480msであり、オフセットOSTは3dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは4である。セット2において、TTTは160msであり、オフセットOSTは3dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは4である。セット3において、TTTは160msであり、オフセットOSTは2dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは1である。セット4において、TTTは80msであり、オフセットOSTは1dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは1である。セット5において、TTTは40msであり、オフセットOSTは-1dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは0である。 In set 1 to set 5, the moving speed of the wireless terminal device 202 is 3 km, 30 km, 60 km, and 120 km per hour, and the base station load factor is 100%. In the set 1, the TTT is 480 ms, the offset OST is 3 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 4. In set 2, the TTT is 160 ms, the offset OST is 3 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 4. In set 3, the TTT is 160 ms, the offset OST is 2 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 1. In set 4, the TTT is 80 ms, the offset OST is 1 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 1. In set 5, TTT is 40 ms, offset OST is −1 dB, power measurement interval is 200 ms, and filtering coefficient α is 0.
 ここでは、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておく動作を「HO準備短縮」と称する。 Here, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, an operation for completing the handover operation preparation process prior to the handover operation execution determination is referred to as “HO preparation shortening”.
 本シミュレーションでは、無線基地局装置は、最も新しい測定結果通知において受信電力が最も大きい無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する。また、無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置202から、測定結果通知を200msに1回受信する。 In this simulation, the radio base station apparatus selects the radio base station apparatus with the highest received power as the handover destination in the newest measurement result notification. Further, the radio base station apparatus receives a measurement result notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 once every 200 ms.
 また、HO準備短縮を行なった場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間は10msであり、HO準備短縮を行なわない場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間は、図2に示すように、X2インタフェースを用いずにS1インタフェースを用いるハンドオーバ動作を想定し、100msである。 In addition, the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is performed is 10 ms, and the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is not performed is as shown in FIG. 2 without using the X2 interface. Assuming a handover operation using the S1 interface, it is 100 ms.
 図28は、ハンドオーバ失敗確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。 FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a simulation result of a handover failure probability.
 図28を参照して、HO準備短縮を行なう構成では、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)の発生確率を、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べてほとんどのケースで減少させることができる。 Referring to FIG. 28, in the configuration in which HO preparation shortening is performed, the probability of occurrence of handover failure (HOF) can be reduced in most cases compared to the configuration in which HO preparation shortening is not performed.
 図29は、”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。 FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a simulation result of the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO”.
 図29を参照して、HO準備短縮を行なう構成では、”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率は、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて一部に若干の増加が見られる。これは、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)が回避されていることによるものである。 Referring to FIG. 29, in the configuration in which the HO preparation is shortened, the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is slightly increased as compared with the configuration in which the HO preparation is not shortened. This is because handover failure (HOF) is avoided.
 図30は、図28に示すハンドオーバ失敗確率、および図29に示す”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率の和を示す図である。 FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 28 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG.
 図30を参照して、HO準備短縮を行なう構成では、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて、ハンドオーバ失敗確率および”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率の和がほとんどのケースで減少している。 Referring to FIG. 30, in the configuration in which the HO preparation shortening is performed, the sum of the handover failure probability and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is decreased in most cases as compared with the configuration in which the HO preparation shortening is not performed.
 図31は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による改善対象を示す図である。 FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an improvement target by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図31は、サービングセルにおける電波環境よりも周辺セルにおける電波環境の方が良くなってから、実際にハンドオーバ動作が完了するまでの経過時間の内訳を示している。 FIG. 31 shows a breakdown of the elapsed time from when the radio wave environment in the surrounding cells becomes better than that in the serving cell until the handover operation is actually completed.
 ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間は、たとえば無線端末装置202における電力測定処理の間隔に相当する時間T211と、TTTに相当する時間T212と、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間T213と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行時間、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示が送信されてからハンドオーバ完了通知が送信されるまでの時間T214との和である。 The time required for the handover operation is, for example, a time T211 corresponding to an interval of power measurement processing in the wireless terminal device 202, a time T212 corresponding to TTT, a preparation time T213 for handover operation, and an execution time of the handover operation, that is, RRC This is the sum of the time T214 from when the connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
 なお、TTTは、前述のように、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が一定間隔で測定結果通知を送信するための周期である。このため、時間T211および時間T212は重複する場合がある。図31では、説明を簡単にするために、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が最初に送信した測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ動作が行なわれる場合を示している。 Note that, as described above, TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T211 and time T212 may overlap. For the sake of simplicity, FIG. 31 shows a case where a handover operation is performed based on a measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after transition to the report-on state.
 時間T211は、たとえば200msであり、CQIレポートを利用する場合には最短で5msとなる。また、時間T212は、たとえば40ms~1000msである。また、時間T213は、たとえば40ms~100msである。また、時間T214は、たとえば50msである。 The time T211 is, for example, 200 ms, and is 5 ms at the shortest when the CQI report is used. The time T212 is 40 ms to 1000 ms, for example. The time T213 is, for example, 40 ms to 100 ms. The time T214 is 50 ms, for example.
 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における「HO準備短縮」による改善対象は、時間T213である。 The improvement target by “HO preparation shortening” in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention is time T213.
 なお、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理は、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の後に行なわれる。このため、HO準備短縮を行っても、”Ping Pong HO”の発生を減らす、すなわち不要なハンドオーバ動作の実行回数を減らす、という効果は直接的には得られない。 Note that the preparation process for the handover operation is performed after the execution of the handover operation is determined. For this reason, even if the HO preparation is shortened, the effect of reducing the occurrence of “Ping Pong HO”, that is, reducing the number of unnecessary handover operations is not directly obtained.
 以上のように、本シミュレーションから、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置により、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作が適切に制御され、無線通信システムにおける通信の安定化が図られることが確認された。 As described above, from this simulation, the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus is appropriately controlled by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and the communication in the radio communication system can be stabilized. Was confirmed.
 次に、本発明の他の実施の形態について図面を用いて説明する。なお、図中同一または相当部分には同一符号を付してその説明は繰り返さない。 Next, another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the drawings, the same or corresponding parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will not be repeated.
 <第2の実施の形態>
 上述した第1の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作において無線端末装置202の通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わる場合について説明した。これに対して、第2の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101A,101Bだけでなくコアネットワークにおける上位装置が切り替えられる場合について説明する。以下で説明する内容以外は第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムと同様である。なお、上位装置としては、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)またはS-GW(Serving Gateway)が挙げられる。
<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a case will be described in which not only the radio base station devices 101A and 101B but also higher-level devices in the core network are switched. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment. Examples of the host device include MME (Mobility Management Entity) or S-GW (Serving Gateway).
 以下、本発明の第2の実施の形態として、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEおよびS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合とに分けて説明する。 Hereinafter, as a second embodiment of the present invention, switching of MME is required in handover operation, switching of S-GW is required in handover operation, and switching of MME and S-GW in handover operation. The explanation is divided into cases where necessary.
(a)MMEの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図32は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(A) When MME switching is required [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図32を参照して、無線通信システム401は、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101Bを備える。ここでは、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から移動し、通信相手すなわち通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わるハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101Bが周辺基地局(ターゲット基地局とも称する)に相当する場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 32, a radio communication system 401 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B. Here, when the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, a handover operation is performed in which the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Is assumed. That is, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station and the radio base station apparatus 101B corresponds to a peripheral base station (also referred to as a target base station).
 図32では、2つの無線基地局装置101A,101Bを代表的に示しているが、さらに多数の無線基地局装置が設けられてもよい。無線通信システム401は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162A,162B(通信制御装置)と、P-GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)163とを備える。 FIG. 32 representatively shows two radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided. The wireless communication system 401 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control device), and a P-GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 163 provided in the core network 301.
 無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101A,101B、S-GW161、および、P-GW163を介してIP網302(上位ネットワーク)におけるサーバ等と通信コネクションを確立し、たとえばIP(Internet Protocol)パケットを含む通信データを送受信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. Communication data including
 S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101BとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A,101B経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and also received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. The transmitted communication data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B.
 MME162Aは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。また、MME162Bは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401. The MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Further, the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 401. The MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 無線基地局装置101A,101Bは、S-GW161およびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。無線基地局装置101A,101BおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B transmit and receive communication data to and from IP network 302 via S-GW 161 and P-GW 163. The radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびMME162Aは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびMME162Bも同様に、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. Similarly, wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines. .
 MME162A,162BおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MMEs 162A, 162B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161およびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 MME162AおよびMME162Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS10インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S10インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム401におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる場合と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない場合とに分けて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of the handover operation in the wireless communication system 401 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described separately when the handover operation execution condition is satisfied and when the handover operation execution condition is not satisfied. To do.
(i)実行条件が満たされる場合
 図33は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(I) When Execution Conditions are Satisfied FIG. 33 is a sequence of handover operations in a situation where the execution conditions for handover operations are satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図33を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS321)。 Referring to FIG. 33, first, wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to wireless base station apparatus 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S321).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバの準備処理を行なうべきであると判断し、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS322)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S322).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、対応する上位装置であるMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS323)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A that is a corresponding higher-level apparatus (step S323).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MMEの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Aは、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する(ステップS324)。 Next, the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its management target (step S324).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象ではないことから、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bへ無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS325)。 Next, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is not a management target, the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S325).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161と、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161とが異なるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161と、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161とが同じであることから、MME162Bは、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS326)。 Next, the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Here, the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302 are the same. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S326).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS327)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S327).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS328)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (Step S328).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS329)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S329).
 ここで、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作の準備期間中に無線基地局装置101Aに当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットが蓄積されている場合、または、S-GW161から対象パケットが新たに受信された場合、無線基地局装置101Aがこの対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Bへ転送するデータフォワーディングが行われる。 Here, when the target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period for the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or the target packet is newly received from the S-GW 161. In this case, data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 このため、MME162Aは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS330)。 Therefore, when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S330).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161は、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的なパスを確立する。そして、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS331)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S331).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、以上のようなハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が実行されて、無線基地局装置101AがMME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する(ステップS332)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. When the above-described handover operation preparation processing is executed and the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S332).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS333)。なお、上述した準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S333). Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS334)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S334).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS335)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S335). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知を、MME162Bへ転送する(ステップS336)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S336).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから転送された状態通知に対する状態通知応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS337)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S337).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS338)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S338).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS339)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S339).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161へ送信する。 Further, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162Bへハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS340)。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161に対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S340). This handover completion notification includes a path switching request to the S-GW 161.
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS341)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S341).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知に対するハンドオーバ完了通知応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS342)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S342).
 次に、MME162Bは、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS343)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S343).
 そして、S-GW161は、MME162Bからベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。 The S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
 次に、S-GW161は、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS344)。 Next, the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switch response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S344).
 そして、S-GW161は、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。 Then, the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161から受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162Aは、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS345)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S345).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Aへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS346)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S346).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS347)。 Next, upon receiving the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S347).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、データフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS348)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S348).
(ii)実行条件が満たされない場合
 図34は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(Ii) Case where Execution Condition is Not Satisfied FIG. 34 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図34を参照して、ステップS351からステップS362までの動作は、図33に示すステップS321からステップS332までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 34, the operation from step S351 to step S362 is the same as the operation from step S321 to step S332 shown in FIG. 33, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS363)。 Next, upon receiving a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S363).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへハンドオーバ動作を中止するためのハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS364)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancel notification for canceling the handover operation to the MME 162A (step S364).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Bへ転送する(ステップS365)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S365).
 次に、MME162Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信すると、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS366)。 Next, when the MME 162B receives the handover cancellation notification, the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S366).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Bへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS367)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S367).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、ハンドオーバ中止応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS368)。 Next, when receiving the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S368).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS369)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S369).
 次に、MME162Aは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS370)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S370).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、データフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS371)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S371).
(b)S-GWの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図35は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(B) When switching of S-GW is necessary [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図35を参照して、無線通信システム402は、図32に示す無線通信システム401と同様に、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTEに従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101Aと、無線基地局装置101Bとを備える。ここでは、図32に示す場合と同様に、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から移動し、通信相手すなわち通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わるようにハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を想定する。 35, radio communication system 402 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. 32, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station A station apparatus 101B. Here, as in the case shown in FIG. 32, the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to 101B.
 無線通信システム402は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161A,161B(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162(通信制御装置)と、P-GW163とを備える。 The wireless communication system 402 further includes S- GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), an MME 162 (communication control device), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
 S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
 S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
 MME162は、無線通信システム402における無線基地局装置101A,101Bおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162は、無線基地局装置101A,101Bとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 402. The MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
 無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161AおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。無線基地局装置101Bは、S-GW161BおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。 The radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101A,101BおよびMME162は、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the MME 162 exchange various data with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
 MME162およびS-GW161A,161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162 and the S- GWs 161A and 161B exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface, which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161A,161BおよびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S- GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム402におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる場合と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない場合とに分けて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of the handover operation in the wireless communication system 402 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described separately when the handover operation execution condition is satisfied and when the handover operation execution condition is not satisfied. To do.
(i)実行条件が満たされる場合
 図36は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(I) When Execution Condition is satisfied FIG. 36 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図36を参照して、ステップS381からステップS383までの動作は、図33に示すステップS321からステップS323までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 36, the operation from step S381 to step S383 is the same as the operation from step S321 to step S323 shown in FIG. 33, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MME162の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101BがMME162の管理対象であることから、MME162は、MMEの切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS384)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its own management target. Here, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is the management target of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S384).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GWの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する(ステップS385)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different (step S385).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットが、S-GW161Bを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS386)。 Next, the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the upper network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the upper network can pass through the S-GW 161B. The S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path with the 101B (step S386).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162から通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS387)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S387).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS388)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S388).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS389)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S389).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS390)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path). The data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S390).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS391)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S391).
 次に、MME162は、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS392)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S392).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS393)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S393).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する(ステップS394)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the base transceiver station 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S394).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS395)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S395).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS396)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S396).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS397)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a state notification indicating its own communication state and the like to the MME 162 (step S397). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS398)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S398).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS399)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S399).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161Bへ送信する。 Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS400)。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161Bに対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S400). This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
 次に、MME162は、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS401)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S401).
 そして、S-GW161Bは、MME162からベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。 The S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
 次に、S-GW161Bは、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS402)。 Next, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (step S402).
 そして、S-GW161Aは、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。 Then, the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161Aから受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161AおよびS-GW161B経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS403)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S403).
 次に、MME162は、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS404)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S404).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS405)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S405).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS406)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S406).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS407)。 Next, when the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S407).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS408)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. Transmit (step S408).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS409)。 Next, the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S409).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS410)。 Next, when the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B. The communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S410).
(ii)実行条件が満たされない場合
 図37は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(Ii) Case where Execution Condition is Not Satisfied FIG. 37 is a sequence of handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図37を参照して、ステップS411からステップS424までの動作は、図36に示すステップS381からステップS394までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 37, the operation from step S411 to step S424 is the same as the operation from step S381 to step S394 shown in FIG. 36, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162からハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS425)。 Next, when receiving the handover instruction from the MME 162, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S425).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS426)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S426).
 次に、MME162は、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信すると、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS427)。 Next, upon receiving the handover cancellation notification, the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S427).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS428)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S428).
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS429)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S429).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS430)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S430).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161Bから通信経路の削除応答を受信すると、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS431)。 Next, when receiving a communication path deletion response from the S-GW 161B, the MME 162 transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S431).
 そして、ステップS432からステップS435までの動作が実行される。これらステップS432からステップS435までの動作は、図36に示すステップS407からステップS410までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S432 to step S435 are executed. Since the operations from step S432 to step S435 are the same as the operations from step S407 to step S410 shown in FIG. 36, detailed description will not be repeated here.
(c)MMEおよびS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図38は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(C) When switching between MME and S-GW is necessary [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図38を参照して、無線通信システム403は、図32に示す無線通信システム401と同様に、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTEに従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101Aと、無線基地局装置101Bとを備える。ここでは、図32に示す場合と同様に、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から移動し、通信相手すなわち通信接続先が、無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わるようにハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 38, radio communication system 403 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by, for example, 3GPP, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. A station apparatus 101B. Here, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 32, the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state in which it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to the apparatus 101B.
 無線通信システム403は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161A,161B(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162A,162B(通信制御装置)と、P-GW163とを備える。 The wireless communication system 403 further includes S- GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control devices), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
 無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161AおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。無線基地局装置101Bは、S-GW161BおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。 The radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびMME162Aは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
 無線基地局装置101BおよびMME162Bは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101B and the MME 162B exchange various kinds of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
 MME162AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。MME162BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface. The MME 162B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161A,161BおよびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S- GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 MME162AおよびMME162Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS10インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S10インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム403におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる場合と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない場合とに分けて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of the handover operation in the wireless communication system 403 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described separately when the handover operation execution condition is satisfied and when the handover operation execution condition is not satisfied. To do.
(i)実行条件が満たされる場合
 図39は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(I) When Execution Conditions are Satisfied FIG. 39 is a sequence of handover operations in a situation where the execution conditions for handover operations are satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図39を参照して、ステップS441からステップS445までの動作は、図33に示すステップS321からステップS325までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 39, the operation from step S441 to step S445 is the same as the operation from step S321 to step S325 shown in FIG. 33, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GWの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する(ステップS446)。 Next, the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different (step S446).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットがS-GW161Bを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS447)。 Next, the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the higher level network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the higher level network can pass through the S-GW 161B. A request is made to the S-GW 161B to create a communication path between them (step S447).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bから通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS448)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives a communication path creation request from the MME 162B, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162B. (Step S448).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS449)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S449).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS450)。 Next, radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from MME 162B, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to MME 162B (step S450).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS451)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path). The data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S451).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS452)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162B, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162B (step S452).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS453)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S453).
 次に、MME162Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための論理的な通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS454)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a logical communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S454).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS455)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S455).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する(ステップS456)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S456).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS457)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S457).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS458)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S458).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS459)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S459). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知を、MME162Bへ転送する(ステップS460)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S460).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから転送された状態通知に対する状態通知応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS461)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S461).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS462)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S462).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS463)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S463).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161Bへ送信する。 Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162Bへハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS464)。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161Bに対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S464). This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS465)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S465).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知に対するハンドオーバ完了通知応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS466)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S466).
 次に、MME162Bは、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS467)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the above path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S467).
 そして、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bからベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスすなわち論理的な通信経路の切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。 Then, the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs a path, that is, a logical communication path switching process, that is, sets the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101A To the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 次に、S-GW161Bは、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS468)。 Next, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S468).
 そして、S-GW161Aは、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。 Then, the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161Aから受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161AおよびS-GW161B経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162Aは、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS469)。 Next, the MME 162A requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S469).
 次に、MME162Aは、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS470)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S470).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Aへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS471)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S471).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162Aから通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS472)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162A, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162A ( Step S472).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS473)。 Next, when the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S473).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS474)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161A deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A. Transmit (step S474).
 次に、MME162Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS475)。 Next, the MME 162B deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S475).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS476)。 Next, when the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B. The communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162B (step S476).
(ii)実行条件が満たされない場合
 図40は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(Ii) Case where Execution Condition is Not Satisfied FIG. 40 is a sequence of handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図40を参照して、ステップS481からステップS496までの動作は、図39に示すステップS441からステップS456までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 40, the operation from step S481 to step S496 is the same as the operation from step S441 to step S456 shown in FIG. 39, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS497)。 Next, upon receiving a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S497).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS498)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162A (step S498).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Bへ転送する(ステップS499)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S499).
 次に、MME162Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信すると、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS500)。 Next, when the MME 162B receives the handover cancellation notification, the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S500).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Bへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS501)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S501).
 次に、MME162Bは、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS502)。 Next, the MME 162B requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S502).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bから通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS503)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162B, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162B ( Step S503).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、ハンドオーバ中止応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS504)。 Next, when receiving the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S504).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS505)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S505).
 そして、ステップS506からステップS509までの動作が実行される。これらステップS506からステップS509までの動作は、図39に示すステップS473からステップS476までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S506 to step S509 are executed. Since the operations from step S506 to step S509 are the same as the operations from step S473 to step S476 shown in FIG. 39, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 ところで、非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、無線通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。 Incidentally, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the wireless communication system.
 これに対して、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム401では、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己から無線基地局装置101Bへの無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応のMME162Aへ送信する。また、MME162Aは、ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象でない場合には、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する。また、MME162Bは、受信したハンドオーバ要求を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信し、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信するとMME162Aに応答を送信する。また、MME162Aは、MME162Bから応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 On the other hand, in the radio communication system 401 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B. It transmits to corresponding MME162A. Further, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the MME 162A, the MME 162A transmits the handover request to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B. In addition, the MME 162B transmits the received handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a response to the MME 162A. Further, the MME 162A receives the response from the MME 162B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. The radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, The provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、無線基地局装置101Aを管理するMME162Aと、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bとが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な無線通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the MME 162A that manages the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B are different, the preparation process for the handover operation is completed prior to determining whether to perform the handover operation. Therefore, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike when adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム401では、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、ハンドオーバ要求を無線基地局装置101Bに対して送信し、準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Also, in the radio communication system 401 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied. The communication quality transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101B and indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、MME162の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the MME 162 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム402では、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己から無線基地局装置101Bへの無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信する。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101Bと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する。また、S-GW161Bは、通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上位ネットワークから送信される無線端末装置202宛の通信データおよび無線端末装置202から送信される上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答をMME162へ送信する。また、MME162は、通信経路作成応答を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。また、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 Also, in the radio communication system 402 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162. To do. In addition, the MME 162 is configured when the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network. Transmits a communication path creation request to the S-GW 161B. In addition, when the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request, the S-GW 161B can relay communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 transmitted from the upper network and communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device 202 to the upper network. A route is created, and a communication route creation response to the communication route creation request is transmitted to the MME 162. Further, when the MME 162 receives the communication path creation response, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. When the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied. In this case, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、無線基地局装置101Aと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101Bと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な無線通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network. However, since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of the handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late. it can. Also, unlike when adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム402では、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記ハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信し、準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Also, in the radio communication system 402 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied. Is transmitted to the MME 162, and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、S-GW161の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the S-GW 161 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 <第3の実施の形態>
 上述した第1の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作において無線端末装置202の通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わる場合について説明した。これに対して、第3の実施の形態では、切り替え先すなわちハンドオーバ先の候補が無線基地局装置101Bだけでなく複数存在する場合について説明する。以下で説明する内容以外は第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と同様である。
<Third Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of switching destinations, that is, handover destination candidates in addition to the radio base station apparatus 101B. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment.
(a)ハンドオーバ先の候補が複数存在する場合における課題
 まず、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する場合における課題について説明する。図41は、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例を説明するための図であり、図42は、図41に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。
(A) Problems when there are a plurality of handover destination candidates First, problems when there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates will be described. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates, and FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a sequence of handover operations in the situation shown in FIG. is there.
 図41を参照して、無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCAを形成し、セルCA内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBを形成し、セルCB内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Cは、セルCCを形成し、セルCC内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 Referring to FIG. 41, radio base station apparatus 101A can communicate with radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming cell CA and transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in cell CA. It is. The radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB. The radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
 ここでは、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが周辺基地局に相当し、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置に該当する場合を想定する。 Here, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
 図42を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。この測定結果には、周辺セルの無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の受信電力の測定結果および無線基地局装置101B,101CのセルIDが含まれている(ステップS511)。 42, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A. This measurement result includes the measurement results of the received power of the radio signals transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells and the cell IDs of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C (step S511).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバの準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover preparation process should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置101B,101Cのうち無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する(ステップS512)。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, as a handover destination radio base station apparatus, that the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is better among the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C that are candidates for the handover destination. Select (step S512).
 次に、ステップS512において例えば無線基地局装置101Bがハンドオーバ先として選択された場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置であるMME(Mobility Management Entity)162へ送信する(ステップS513)。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected as a handover destination in step S512, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 that is a higher-level apparatus. Transmit (step S513).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS514)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S514).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MMEへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS515)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME (step S515).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS516)。上記のようにして、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS517)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S516). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation is completed (step S517).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS518)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S518).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS519)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition (step S519).
 そして、ステップS520からステップS526までの動作が実行される。これらステップS520からステップS526までの動作は、図21に示すステップS174からステップS180までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S520 to step S526 are executed. Since the operations from step S520 to step S526 are the same as the operations from step S174 to step S180 shown in FIG. 21, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 図43は、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例における課題を説明するための図であり、図44は、図43に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 43 is a diagram for explaining a problem in an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates, and FIG. 44 shows an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 43. FIG.
 図43を参照して、無線端末装置202がセルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域内に位置し、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質が最も良い無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後に、無線端末装置202がセルCC内へ進入した場合を想定する。この場合、図44に示すような動作が実行される。 Referring to FIG. 43, handover operation to radio base station apparatus 101B having the best communication quality with radio terminal apparatus 202 when radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in the overlapping area of cell CA, cell CB and cell CC Assume that the wireless terminal device 202 enters the cell CC after the preparation process is completed. In this case, an operation as shown in FIG. 44 is executed.
 図44を参照して、まず、ステップS531からステップS538までの動作が実行される。これらステップS531からステップS538までの動作は、図42に示すステップS511からステップS518までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 44, first, operations from step S531 to step S538 are executed. Since the operations from step S531 to step S538 are the same as the operations from step S511 to step S518 shown in FIG. 42, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて通信品質を新たに取得する。このとき、無線端末装置202はセルCC内へ進入しており、無線基地局装置101Aにより新たに取得された無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしていないとする。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202の無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS539)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202. At this time, the wireless terminal device 202 has entered the cell CC, and the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202 newly acquired by the wireless base station device 101A satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Suppose that it does not meet. In this case, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the radio base station apparatus 101B should be stopped (step S539).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162に対して無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作を中止するためのハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS540)。そして、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS541)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification for canceling the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S540). Then, the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S541).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS542)。そして、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS543)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S542). Then, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S543).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した測定結果に基づいて、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。このとき、無線端末装置202は、セルCC内へ進入しているため、無線基地局装置101Cが新たにハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択される(ステップS544)。そして、再びハンドオーバ動作の準備処理(ステップS545からステップS549)が行われる。これらステップS545からステップS549までの動作は、図42に示すステップS513からステップS517までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A selects a handover destination wireless base station device based on the newly acquired measurement result. At this time, since the wireless terminal device 202 has entered the cell CC, the wireless base station device 101C is newly selected as a handover destination wireless base station device (step S544). Then, a handover operation preparation process (steps S545 to S549) is performed again. Since the operations from step S545 to step S549 are the same as the operations from step S513 to step S517 shown in FIG. 42, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 このように、ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理が繰り返される。 As described above, it is conceivable that the radio terminal apparatus 202 related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. In such a case, the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation stop process are repeated.
(b)本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404について、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数あり、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する場合と、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する場合とに分けて説明する。
(B) Radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention Next, with respect to the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates. The case where the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A selects the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the case where the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects the handover destination radio base station apparatus will be described separately.
 再び図41を参照して、本発明の第3の実施の形態では、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した状況において、無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ動作の準備条件を満たしている場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 41 again, in the third embodiment of the present invention, after radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA and selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, cell CA, It is assumed that the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C satisfy the preparation conditions for the handover operation in a situation where the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have moved to the overlapping area of the cell CB and the cell CC.
(i)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図45は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。
(I) When the handover source radio base station apparatus selects the handover destination [Configuration and Basic Operation]
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図45を参照して、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404は、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cを備える。図45では、3つの無線基地局装置を代表的に示しているが、さらに多数の無線基地局装置が設けられてもよい。無線通信システム404は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW(Serving Gateway)161(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME(Mobility Management Entity)162(通信制御装置)と、P-GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)163とを含む。 Referring to FIG. 45, radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A. , 101B, 101C. In FIG. 45, three radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided. The wireless communication system 404 further includes an S-GW (Serving Gateway) 161 (gateway device), an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 (communication control device) provided in the core network 301, and a P-GW (Packet Data Network). Gateway) 163.
 無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cと、S-GW161と、P-GW163とを介してIP網302におけるサーバ等と通信コネクションを確立し、たとえばIP(Internet Protocol)パケットを含む通信データを送受信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. Send and receive communication data.
 S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. The communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
 MME162は、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C、および無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 401. The MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、S-GW161およびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C transmit and receive communication data to and from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびMME162は、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
 MME162およびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162 and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161およびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 (無線基地局装置の詳細な構成)
 また、無線通信システム404の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、いずれも本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置101と同様である。すなわち、図19および図20を参照して、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを含む。
(Detailed configuration of radio base station device)
Also, the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of the radio communication system 404 are all the same as the radio base station apparatus 101 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. That is, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C include an antenna 91, a circulator 92, a radio reception unit 93, a radio transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control. Part 98.
 また、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、ハンドオーバ要求部11と、ハンドオーバ指示部12と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14と、端末測定結果取得部15とを有する。 Further, the control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 11, a handover instruction unit 12, a handover condition adjustment unit 13, a handover information acquisition unit 14, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15. Have
 ハンドオーバ要求部11は、ハンドオーバ要求を複数の他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部11は、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置101B,101Cとの間でハンドオーバの準備条件が満たされている場合、無線基地局装置101B,101Cの双方に対してハンドオーバ要求を送信する。 The handover request unit 11 transmits a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses. For example, the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that both the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have a handover preparation condition between the radio terminal apparatus 202 and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. A handover request is transmitted to.
 ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部11が無線基地局装置101B,101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ動作の実行が可能であることを示す応答を送信した場合、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補として、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 The handover instruction unit 12 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, and selects a handover destination radio base station apparatus from among the other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response. For example, the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Is transmitted, the handover instructing unit 12 of the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates, and selects the handover destination radio base station from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Select a station device.
 具体的には、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、この測定結果に基づいて、無線端末装置202との間の通信状態が良い方の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。 Specifically, the handover instructing unit 12 acquires the measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on the measurement result, the radio terminal device The radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、選択したハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示を、無線端末装置202へ送信する。 Further, the handover instruction unit 12 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing a handover operation to the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、本発明の第1の実施の形態と同様に、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関するハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対してRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信せず、ハンドオーバ中止通知を他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。 Similarly to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover instructing unit 12 receives the response and executes handover related to the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202. If the condition is not satisfied, the assignment of the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 12 does not transmit an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a handover cancellation notification to another radio base station apparatus. Send.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cから上記応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない測定結果に対応する他の無線基地局装置を、ハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことが可能である。 Further, after receiving the response from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, the handover instruction unit 12 can exclude other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the measurement results that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates. is there.
 すなわち、たとえば、無線端末装置202により受信電力の測定が行われ、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備が開始されてから、次に上記測定が行われるまでの間に、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Cとの間の受信電力を測定することができない程度に無線基地局装置101Cから離れた位置へ移動する場合を想定する。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aが、上記応答を受信してから所定期間内に無線端末装置202から受信する測定結果通知には、無線基地局装置101Bと無線端末装置202との通信状態を示す受信電力の測定結果に関する情報が含まれているものの、無線基地局装置101Cと無線端末装置202との通信状態を示す受信電力の測定結果に関する情報が含まれていないということがある。このような場合、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことができる。 That is, for example, after the reception power is measured by the wireless terminal device 202 and the preparation for the handover operation to the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C is started, the wireless terminal It is assumed that the device 202 moves to a position away from the radio base station device 101C to such an extent that the received power with the radio base station device 101C cannot be measured. In this case, the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202 within a predetermined period after the wireless base station device 101A receives the response indicates the communication state between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202. Although information related to the measurement result of the received power is included, information related to the measurement result of the received power indicating the communication state between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may not be included. In such a case, the handover instructing unit 12 can remove the radio base station apparatus 101C from the handover destination candidates.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、上記応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の他の無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ動作の中止通知を送信する。 Further, after the handover operation is completed, the handover instructing unit 12 notifies the other base transceiver station other than the handover destination base transceiver station among the other base transceiver stations corresponding to the response to stop the handover operation. Send.
 すなわち、たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部11が無線基地局装置101B,101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ動作の実行が可能であることを示す応答を送信した場合であって、ハンドオーバ指示部12が、ハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101Bを選択する場合を想定する。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aが、たとえば上位装置経由で無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバが完了したことを示す通知を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ先ではない無線基地局装置101Cへハンドオーバ動作の中止通知を送信する。 That is, for example, the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. A case is assumed where a response indicating that there is a transmission and the handover instruction unit 12 selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination. In this case, when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives, for example, a notification indicating that the handover is completed from the radio base station apparatus 101B via the higher-level apparatus, the handover instruction unit 12 of the radio base station apparatus 101A A handover operation stop notification is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101C.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて説明する。図46は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
Next, a flow of a handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A selects a handover destination in the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 46 is a sequence of the handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図46を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。この測定結果通知には、周辺セルの無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の受信電力の測定結果が含まれている(ステップS551)。 46, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A. This measurement result notification includes the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells (step S551).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補とする(ステップS552)。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S552).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信する(ステップS553)。また、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信する(ステップS554)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S553). Also, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101C to the MME 162 (step S554).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS555)。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Cへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS556)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S555). Further, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S556).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS557)。また、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS558)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S557). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (Step S558).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS559)。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先とするハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS560)。上記のようにして、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS561)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S559). Also, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101C as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S560). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S561).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS562)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S562).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中から、例えば無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。第3の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS563)。 At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In 3rd Embodiment, the case where the wireless base station apparatus 101B is selected is assumed (step S563).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へ、無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS564)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S564).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS565)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S565).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから状態通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS566)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A, and transmits a status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S566).
 また、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS567)。 Further, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S567).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS568)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S568).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS569)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S569).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置101B以外の無線基地局装置、すなわち無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を中止するためのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162へ送信する(ステップS570)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and performs a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. A handover cancel notification for canceling is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S570).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS571)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S571).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS572)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S572).
 そして、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS573)。 Then, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S573).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162からハンドオーバ中止応答を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS574)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S574).
 なお、上述した動作の流れでは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了し(ステップS568)、無線基地局装置101AがMME162から端末情報解放指示を受信した(ステップS569)後に、無線基地局装置101AがMME162へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信している(ステップS570)。しかしながら、必ずしもこのような動作の流れに限定されず、例えば、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了する前に無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ動作中止通知をMME162へ送信してもよい。この場合、例えば、ステップS570からステップS573までの動作が、ステップS567の前に行われる。 In the operation flow described above, the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed (step S568), and after the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162 (step S569), the radio base station The apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S570). However, the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to. In this case, for example, the operations from step S570 to step S573 are performed before step S567.
 このように、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cのハンドオーバ要求部11は、ハンドオーバ要求を複数の他の無線基地局装置に対して行う。 As described above, in the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C sends a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station devices. Do it.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 It can be considered that the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent the communication between the device 202 and the radio base station device from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、無線通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 Further, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信して、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択し、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行う指示を与える。 Also, in the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 receives a handover response, and receives a handover destination radio from other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response. A base station apparatus is selected, and an instruction to perform a handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus is given to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 このように、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択したうえで無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える構成により、当該指示内に複数の無線基地局装置を提示する場合と比べて情報量を少なくすることができ、当該指示内容を簡潔にすることができる。 Thus, by selecting a handover destination radio base station apparatus and giving an instruction for a handover operation to the radio terminal apparatus 202, the information is compared with the case where a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction. The amount can be reduced, and the contents of the instruction can be simplified.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信した後、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、この測定結果に基づいてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 Moreover, in the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, after receiving the handover response, the handover instructing unit 12 transmits a radio signal transmitted from another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response. A measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 is acquired, and a handover destination radio base station device is selected based on the measurement result.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備完了後の無線端末装置202における電波環境に応じて、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate radio base station apparatus as a handover destination according to the radio wave environment in the radio terminal apparatus 202 after completion of preparation for the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない測定結果に対応する他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補から外す。 Also, in the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 receives another radio base station apparatus corresponding to a measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period after receiving the handover response as the handover destination. Remove from the candidate.
 このような構成により、たとえば、無線端末装置202が受信電力を測定できない程度に無線端末装置202との距離が離れてしまった無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことができるため、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With such a configuration, for example, a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus 202 cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates. A suitable radio base station apparatus can be selected.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、ハンドオーバ応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の他の無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ動作の中止要求を送信する。 Also, in the radio communication system 404 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 performs handover target radio base station among other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the handover response after the handover operation is completed. A request for canceling the handover operation is transmitted to a radio base station apparatus other than the station apparatus.
 ここで、たとえば、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作がハンドオーバ動作の完了前に中止された後、無線端末装置202が、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置に近づく方向に移動する場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置が最適なハンドオーバ先となることがある。この場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を再び行う必要がある。 Here, for example, after the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination is canceled before the handover operation is completed, the radio terminal apparatus 202 may When moving in a direction approaching the apparatus, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
 これに対して、無線通信システム404におけるハンドオーバ指示部12は、上記のように、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作が完了した後に中止する。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作が完了するまでの間に無線端末装置202が移動して電波状況が変わり、他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合であっても、再びハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行う必要がない。 On the other hand, the handover instruction unit 12 in the wireless communication system 404 performs the handover operation to the wireless base station device other than the wireless base station device selected as the handover destination as described above. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device 202 moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need to do it.
(ii)無線端末装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 次に、無線端末装置202が、複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する場合について説明する。ここでは、上述した「(i)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合」における無線通信システム404と異なる点について説明する。
(Ii) When the wireless terminal device selects a handover destination [Configuration and basic operation]
Next, a case where the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects a handover destination from a plurality of handover destination candidates will be described. Here, differences from radio communication system 404 in “(i) When the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination” will be described.
 (無線基地局装置の詳細な構成)
 再び図19および図20を参照して、第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを備える。
(Detailed configuration of radio base station device)
Referring to FIGS. 19 and 20 again, radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 405 according to the third embodiment include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio receiver 93, and radio A transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control unit 98 are provided.
 また、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、ハンドオーバ要求部11と、ハンドオーバ指示部12と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部13と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部14と、端末測定結果取得部15とを含む。 Further, the control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 11, a handover instruction unit 12, a handover condition adjustment unit 13, a handover information acquisition unit 14, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 15. including.
 ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補とし、この候補である無線基地局装置を示す情報を無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The handover instruction unit 12 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, sets another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response as a handover destination candidate, and indicates the radio base station apparatus that is the candidate Information is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部11が無線基地局装置101B,101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ動作の実行が可能であることを示す応答を送信した場合、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補として、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示を、無線端末装置202へ送信する。 For example, the handover request unit 11 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Is transmitted, the handover instruction unit 12 of the radio base station apparatus 101A instructs the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C to perform a handover operation using the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates. The RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 ここで、図47は、RRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の比較例を示す図であり、図48は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ要求部から送信されるRRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の一例を示す図である。 Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the message structure of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction, and FIG. 48 is transmitted from the handover request unit in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration instruction | indication.
 図47に示すように、たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101Bを選択して、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、RRCコネクション再構成指示の「Mobility Control Info」に無線基地局装置101Bの情報のみを含める(図47の「Info1」参照)。 As shown in FIG. 47, for example, when the radio base station apparatus 101A selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A Includes only the information of the radio base station apparatus 101B in the “Mobility Control Info” of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (see “Info1” in FIG. 47).
 これに対して、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する場合には、たとえば図48に示すように、無線基地局装置101Aは、RRCコネクション再構成指示の「Mobility Control Info」に複数の無線基地局装置の情報(「Target Cell List」)を列挙して無線端末装置202へ送信する(図48の「Info2」参照)。これにより、無線端末装置202は、受信したRRCコネクション再構成指示から、ハンドオーバ先の候補である複数の無線基地局装置を把握することができる。 On the other hand, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects a handover destination radio base station apparatus, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 48, the radio base station apparatus 101A performs “Mobility Control Info” in an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction. The information (“Target Cell List”) of a plurality of radio base station devices is enumerated and transmitted to the radio terminal device 202 (see “Info2” in FIG. 48). Thereby, the radio | wireless terminal apparatus 202 can grasp | ascertain the some radio base station apparatus which is a candidate of a handover destination from the received RRC connection reconfiguration | reconfiguration instruction | indication.
 そして、無線端末装置202が、RRCコネクション再構成指示を受信してハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。ハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線端末装置202によって選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、自己の無線基地局装置の通信状態を示す状態通知をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ送信する。 Then, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction and selects a handover destination wireless base station device. The handover instructing unit 12 receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 and sends a status notification indicating the communication state of its own radio base station apparatus to the handover destination radio base station apparatus Send to.
 (無線端末装置の詳細な構成)
 図49は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの無線端末装置の構成を示す図である。
(Detailed configuration of wireless terminal device)
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a wireless terminal apparatus of the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図49を参照して、無線通信システム405の無線端末装置202は、アンテナ21と、サーキュレータ22と、受信部23と、送信部24と、信号処理部25とを備える。信号処理部25は、受信信号処理部26と、選択部27と、通信制御部28とを含む。 49, the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless communication system 405 includes an antenna 21, a circulator 22, a receiving unit 23, a transmitting unit 24, and a signal processing unit 25. The signal processing unit 25 includes a reception signal processing unit 26, a selection unit 27, and a communication control unit 28.
 サーキュレータ22は、アンテナ21において受信された無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cからの無線信号を受信部23へ出力し、また、送信部24から受けた無線信号をアンテナ21へ出力する。 The circulator 22 outputs the radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C received at the antenna 21 to the reception unit 23 and outputs the radio signals received from the transmission unit 24 to the antenna 21.
 受信部23は、サーキュレータ22から受けた無線信号を信号処理部25へ出力する。受信信号処理部26は、受信部23から出力される無線信号に対して、CDMA(Code Division Multiple Access)方式における逆拡散等の各種信号処理を行う。 The receiving unit 23 outputs the radio signal received from the circulator 22 to the signal processing unit 25. The received signal processing unit 26 performs various signal processing such as despreading in a CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the radio signal output from the receiving unit 23.
 選択部27は、たとえば、無線端末装置202の通信接続先である無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cから受信したRRCコネクション再構成指示に基づいて、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 For example, based on the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction received from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C that are communication connection destinations of the radio terminal apparatus 202, the selection unit 27 determines whether the radio base station apparatus is a handover destination candidate. To select a handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 具体的には、無線端末装置202の選択部27は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、この測定結果に基づいて、無線端末装置202との間の通信状態が良い方の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。 Specifically, the selection unit 27 of the wireless terminal device 202 acquires a measurement result of the received power in the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless signal transmitted from the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on the measurement result Then, the radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 通信制御部28は、選択部27により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報または自ら生成した情報に対して、OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex)方式におけるIFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)等の各種信号処理を行ない、この信号処理後の信号を送信部24へ出力する。 The communication control unit 28 uses, for example, an IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) in an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the selection unit 27 or information generated by itself. Various signal processing is performed, and the signal after this signal processing is output to the transmitter 24.
 送信部24は、通信制御部28から受けた信号をサーキュレータ22へ出力する。たとえば、送信部24は、選択部27により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報、すなわちハンドオーバ先通知をサーキュレータ22およびアンテナ21を介して、無線端末装置202の通信接続先である無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。 The transmission unit 24 outputs the signal received from the communication control unit 28 to the circulator 22. For example, the transmission unit 24 transmits information indicating the handover destination radio base station device selected by the selection unit 27, that is, a handover destination notification via the circulator 22 and the antenna 21, as a wireless connection destination of the radio terminal device 202. Transmit to base station apparatus 101A.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405において、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて説明する。図50は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of a handover operation when the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects a handover destination in the radio communication system 405 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 50 is a sequence of the handover operation when the radio terminal apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図50を参照して、ステップS581からステップS592までの動作が実行される。これらステップS581からステップS592までの動作は、図46に示すステップS551からステップS562までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 50, the operations from step S581 to step S592 are executed. Since the operations from step S581 to step S592 are the same as the operations from step S551 to step S562 shown in FIG. 46, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS593)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition (step S593).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ先の候補として判断した無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を無線端末装置202へ指示するため、RRCコネクション再構成指示を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS594)。 Next, radio base station apparatus 101A issues an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to instruct radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation to radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C determined as a handover destination candidate based on the measurement result notification. It transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S594).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。第3の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS595)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and the handover operation preparation process is completed. A handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected from the existing radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. In the third embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S595).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、選択したハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bを示す情報、すなわちハンドオーバ先通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS596)。 Next, the radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits information indicating the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, a handover destination notification to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S596).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202によって選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bを示す情報を受信して、MME162へ無線基地局装置101Aの通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する。この状態通知には、たとえばハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置101Bを示す情報が含まれる(ステップS597)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a status notification indicating the communication status of the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162. Send. This state notification includes, for example, information indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination (step S597).
 そして、ステップS598からステップS606までの動作が実行される。これらステップS598からステップS606までの動作は、図46に示すステップS566からステップS574までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S598 to step S606 are executed. Since the operations from step S598 to step S606 are the same as the operations from step S566 to step S574 shown in FIG. 46, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 このように、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信して、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を無線端末装置202へ送信する。 As described above, in the radio communication system 405 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 receives the handover response, and designates another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response as a handover destination candidate. Is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 このように、無線端末装置202にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択させる構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が選択する場合に比べて、最新の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 As described above, the configuration in which the wireless terminal device 202 selects the handover destination wireless base station device makes it possible to select the handover destination wireless base station according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source wireless base station device selects. A device can be selected.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405において、ハンドオーバ指示部12は、無線端末装置202によって選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、受信した情報の示すハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ所定の情報を送信する。 Also, in the radio communication system 405 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 12 receives and receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 Predetermined information is transmitted to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the information.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が、無線端末装置202により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を把握したうえで、ハンドオーバ動作に必要な情報を当該ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ送信するので、無駄のない情報の送受信を行うことができる。 With such a configuration, the handover source radio base station apparatus grasps the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits information necessary for the handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. Since it is transmitted to the apparatus, it is possible to transmit and receive information without waste.
 <第4の実施の形態>
 上述した第1の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作において無線端末装置202の通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わる場合について説明した。これに対して、第4の実施の形態では、切り替え先すなわちハンドオーバ先の候補が複数あり、かつ、コアネットワークにおける上位装置も切り替えられる場合について説明する。以下で説明する内容以外は第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と同様である。なお、上位装置としては、第2の実施の形態と同様に、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)またはS-GW(Serving Gateway)が挙げられる。
<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of switching destinations, that is, handover destination candidates, and the host device in the core network is also switched. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment. As the host device, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity) or S-GW (Serving Gateway) can be cited as in the second embodiment.
 以下、本発明の第4の実施の形態として、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合とに分けて説明する。 Hereinafter, as a fourth embodiment of the present invention, a case where MME switching is required in a handover operation and a case where S-GW switching is required in a handover operation will be described separately.
(a)MMEの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図51は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(A) When MME switching is required [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図51を参照して、第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406は、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cを備える。 Referring to FIG. 51, a radio communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C is provided.
 図41および図43を参照して、図41に示すように、無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCAを形成し、セルCA内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBを形成し、セルCB内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Cは、セルCCを形成し、セルCC内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 Referring to FIG. 41 and FIG. 43, as shown in FIG. 41, the radio base station apparatus 101A forms a cell CA, and transmits and receives radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CA. Communication with the wireless terminal device 202 is possible. The radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB. The radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
 ここでは、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが周辺基地局に相当し、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置に該当する場合を想定する。 Here, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
 再び図51を参照して、無線通信システム406は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162A,162B,162C(通信制御装置)と、P-GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)163とを備える。 Referring again to FIG. 51, the wireless communication system 406 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MME 162A, 162B, 162C (communication control device), and P-GW (Packet Data) provided in the core network 301. Network Gateway) 163.
 無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cと、S-GW161と、P-GW163とを介してIP網302(上位ネットワーク)におけるサーバ等と通信コネクションを確立し、たとえばIP(Internet Protocol)パケットを含む通信データを送受信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163. Protocol) Communication data including packets is transmitted and received.
 S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. The communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
 MME162Aは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。また、MME162Bは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。MME162Cは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Cおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401. The MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Further, the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 401. The MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B. The MME 162C manages the wireless base station device 101C, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401. The MME 162C transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101C.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびMME162Aは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびMME162Bも同様に、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101CおよびMME162Cも同様に、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. Similarly, wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines. . Similarly, the wireless base station apparatus 101C and the MME 162C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
 MME162A,162B,162CおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MMEs 162A, 162B, 162C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161およびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 MME162A,MME162BおよびMME162Cは、論理的なインタフェースであるS10インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S10インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A, MME 162B, and MME 162C exchange various data with each other via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface that is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 図52は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
FIG. 52 is a sequence of a handover operation in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図52を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS611)。 52, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A becomes worse, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A. When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S611).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補とする(ステップS612)。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S612).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS613)。また、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS614)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S613). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162A (step S614).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MMEの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Aは、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101B,101Cが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する(ステップS615)。 Next, the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station devices 101B and 101C indicated in the handover request are their management targets (step S615).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象ではないことから、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bへ無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS616)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B because the radio base station apparatus 101B is not a management target of the MME 162A (step S616).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと同じであることから、MME162Bは、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS617)。 Next, the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Here, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is the same as the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S617).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS618)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S618).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS619)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S619).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS620)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S620).
 ここで、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作の準備期間中に無線基地局装置101Aに無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットが蓄積されている場合、または、S-GW161から対象パケットが新たに受信された場合、無線基地局装置101Aがこの対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Bへ転送するデータフォワーディングが行われる。 Here, when a target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or a new target packet is received from the S-GW 161. When received, data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers this target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 このため、MME162Aは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS621)。 Therefore, when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S621).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161は、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的なパスを確立する。そして、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS622)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S622).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、以上のようなハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が実行されて、無線基地局装置101AがMME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する(ステップS623)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. When the above-described handover operation preparation processing is executed and the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S623).
 また、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Cが自己の管理対象ではないことにより、無線基地局装置101Cを管理するMME162Cへ無線基地局装置101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS624)。 Also, the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162C that manages the radio base station apparatus 101C because the radio base station apparatus 101C is not a management target of itself (step S624).
 次に、MME162Cは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと同じであることから、MME162Cは、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS625)。 Next, the MME 162C determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162C includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Here, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is the same as the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Therefore, the MME 162C determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S625).
 次に、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS626)。 Next, the MME 162C transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S626).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162Cからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Cへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS627)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162C and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162C (step S627).
 次に、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS628)。 Next, the MME 162C transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162A (step S628).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Cからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパスの確立要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS629)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the MME 162C, the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path, to the S-GW 161 (step S629).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161は、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的なパスを確立する。そして、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS630)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101C through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S630).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Cへ転送する(ステップS631)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the wireless base station device 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S631).
 上記のようにして、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS632)。なお、上記のようなステップS616からステップS623までの動作と、ステップS624からステップS631までの動作は並行して行われるものとする。 As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S632). Note that the operations from step S616 to step S623 as described above and the operations from step S624 to step S631 are performed in parallel.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS633)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S633).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。なお、上述した準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中から、例えば無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。第4の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS634)。 At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S634).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202へ、無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS635)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S635).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS636)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the MME 162A (step S636). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知を、MME162Bへ転送する(ステップS637)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S637).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから転送された状態通知に対する状態通知応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS638)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S638).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS639)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S639).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS640)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S640).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161へ送信する。 Further, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162Bへハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161に対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる(ステップS641)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B. This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161 (step S641).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS642)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S642).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知に対するハンドオーバ完了通知応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS643)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S643).
 次に、MME162Bは、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS644)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S644).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Bからベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。そして、S-GW161は、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS645)。 Next, the S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Switch to 101B. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switch response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S645).
 そして、S-GW161は、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Then, the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending. In addition, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and stores the transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 that does not pass through the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161から受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、上記のようなデータフォワーディングが完了すると、MME162Aは、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS646)。 Next, when the data forwarding as described above is completed, the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S646).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aから端末情報解放指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ先として選択されて無線基地局装置101B以外の無線基地局装置、すなわち無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS647)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, and is selected as the handover destination and notifies the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S647).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Cへ転送する(ステップS648)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notice to the radio base station apparatus 101C received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162C (step S648).
 次に、MME162Cは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS649)。 Next, the MME 162C receives the handover cancellation notification from the MME 162A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S649).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162Cから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Cへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS650)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162C, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162C (step S650).
 次に、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS651)。 Next, the MME 162C receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S651).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Cから受信したハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS652)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162C to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S652).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ中止応答を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Aへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS653)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S653).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS654)。 Next, when the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A issues a request to delete the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. It transmits to GW161 (step S654).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS655)。 Next, when the S-GW 161 receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101B via itself, and the data forwarding path deletion response. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S655).
 また、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Cとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS656)。 When the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A issues a request to delete the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S656).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Cとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS657)。 Next, when the S-GW 161 receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101C via the data transmission path, and receives a data forwarding path deletion response. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S657).
 なお、上述した動作の流れでは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了し、無線基地局装置101AがMME162から端末情報解放指示を受信した(ステップS646)後に、無線基地局装置101AがMME162へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信している(ステップS647)。しかしながら、必ずしもこのような動作の流れに限定されず、例えば、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了する前に無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ動作中止通知をMME162へ送信してもよい。この場合、たとえば、ステップS647からステップS652までの動作が、ステップS640の前に行われる。 In the above-described operation flow, after the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed and the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162 (step S646), the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the MME 162. The handover stop notification is transmitted to (step S647). However, the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to. In this case, for example, the operations from step S647 to step S652 are performed before step S640.
 このように、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406において、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101B,101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求を受信し、ハンドオーバ要求の示す無線基地局装置101B,101Cごとに自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断し、自己の管理対象でない場合には、無線基地局装置101B,101Cを管理するMME162B,162Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信する。 As described above, in the wireless communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the MME 162A receives the handover request indicating the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C as the handover destination from the wireless base station device 101A, and receives the handover request. Is determined for each of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. If the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C are not their own management targets, a handover request is sent to the MMEs 162B and 162C that manage the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Send.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 It can be considered that the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the device 202 and the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、無線通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 Further, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
(b)S-GWの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図53は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(B) When switching of S-GW is necessary [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図53を参照して、第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム407は、図51に示す無線通信システム406と同様に、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTEに従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cを備える。ここでは、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが周辺基地局に相当し、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置に該当する場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 53, radio communication system 407 according to the fourth embodiment is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similarly to radio communication system 406 shown in FIG. Base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C are provided. Here, it is assumed that radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA, selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, and then moves to an overlapping area of cell CA, cell CB, and cell CC. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
 再び図53を参照して、無線通信システム407は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161A,161B,161C(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162(通信制御装置)と、P-GW163とを備える。 Referring to FIG. 53 again, the wireless communication system 407 further includes S- GWs 161A, 161B, 161C (gateway devices), an MME 162 (communication control device), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301. .
 S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
 S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
 S-GW161Cは、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Cは、無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101C経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161C is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161C transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101C.
 MME162は、無線通信システム402における無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 402. The MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101CおよびS-GW161Cは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101C and the S-GW 161C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびMME162は、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
 MME162およびS-GW161A,161B,161Cは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162 and the S- GWs 161A, 161B, and 161C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface that is a logical interface.
 S-GW161A,161B,161CおよびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S- GW 161A, 161B, 161C and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 図54は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
FIG. 54 is a sequence of a handover operation in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図54を参照して、ステップS661からステップS664までの動作は、図52に示すステップS611からステップS614までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 54, the operation from step S661 to step S664 is the same as the operation from step S611 to step S614 shown in FIG. 52, and therefore, detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MME162の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101B,101Cが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101B,101CがMME162の管理対象であることから、MME162は、MMEの切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS665)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C indicated in the handover request are their management targets. Here, since the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C are the management targets of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S665).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GWの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する(ステップS666)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Further, in the MME 162, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is different from the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. It is determined whether or not (step S666).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットが、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS667)。 Next, the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Due to the difference, the downstream packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 from the higher level network and the upstream packet from the wireless terminal device 202 to the higher level network are connected between the wireless base station device 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B so as to be able to pass through the GW 161B (step S667).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162から通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS668)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S668).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS669)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S669).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS670)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (Step S670).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパスの確立要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS671)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 transmits a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path establishment request to the S-GW 161B (step S671). ).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS672)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S672).
 次に、MME162は、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS673)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S673).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS674)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S674).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する(ステップS675)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S675).
 また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットが、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Cを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Cへ要求する(ステップS676)。 The MME 162 is different in S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Therefore, the S-GW 161C in which the downstream packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 from the higher level network and the upstream packet from the wireless terminal device 202 to the higher level network are connected between the wireless base station device 101C and the IP network 302. Is requested to the S-GW 161C to create a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S676).
 次に、S-GW161Cは、MME162から通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS677)。 Next, the S-GW 161C receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C passing through the S-GW 161C, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S677).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS678)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S678).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS679)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S679).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパスの確立要求をS-GW161Cへ送信する(ステップS680)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path, to the S-GW 161C (step S680). ).
 次に、S-GW161Cは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Cは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Cとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Cと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Cは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS681)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161C establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161C establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161C, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161C and radio base station apparatus 101C. Then, the S-GW 161C transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S681).
 次に、MME162は、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS682)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S682).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS674)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S674).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Cへ転送する(ステップS684)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the wireless base station device 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S684).
 上記のようにして、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS685)。なお、上記のようなステップS667からステップS675までの動作と、ステップS676からステップS684までの動作は並行して行われるものとする。 As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S685). Note that the operations from step S667 to step S675 as described above and the operations from step S676 to step S684 are performed in parallel.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS686)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S686).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。なお、上述した準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中から、例えば無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。第4の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS687)。 At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S687).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へ、無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS688)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S688).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS689)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S689). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS690)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating the content of communication with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S690).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS691)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S691).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161Bへ送信する。 Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161Bに対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる(ステップS6492)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162. This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B (step S6492).
 次に、MME162は、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS693)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S693).
 そして、S-GW161Bは、MME162からベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。そして、S-GW161Bは、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS694)。 The S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (Step S694).
 そして、S-GW161Aは、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Then, the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending. Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and stores the transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B that does not pass through the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161Aから受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161AおよびS-GW161B経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS695)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (Step S695).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS696)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S696).
 次に、MME162は、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS697)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S697).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ先として選択されて無線基地局装置101B以外の無線基地局装置、すなわち無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162へ送信する(ステップS698)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and is selected as the handover destination and notifies the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. Is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S698).
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Cへ要求する(ステップS699)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161C to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C (Step S699).
 次に、S-GW161Cは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS700)。 Next, the S-GW 161C receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S700).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161Cから通信経路の削除応答を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS701)。 Next, the MME 162 receives a communication path deletion response from the S-GW 161C, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S701).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS702)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S702).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS703)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S703).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162からハンドオーバ中止応答を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS704)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S704).
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS705)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S705).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS706)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the data forwarding path (step S706).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS707)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S707).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS708)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response. It transmits to MME162 (step S708).
 また、MME162は、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS709)。 Also, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path (Step S709).
 また、MME162は、S-GW161Cと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Cへ要求する(ステップS710)。 Also, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161C to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161C and the radio base station apparatus 101C, that is, the data forwarding path (Step S710).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS711)。 Next, when the S-GW 161A receives the data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, it deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response. It transmits to MME162 (step S711).
 また、S-GW161Cは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Cと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS712)。 When the S-GW 161C receives the data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161C deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161C and the radio base station apparatus 101C, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. (Step S712).
 このように、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム407において、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101B,101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求を受信し、ハンドオーバ要求の示す無線基地局装置101B,101Cごとに、無線基地局装置101Aと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置161Aと、無線基地局装置101B,101Cと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置161B,161Cとが異なるか否かを判断し、異なると判断したゲートウェイ装置161B,161Cへ通信経路作成要求を送信する。 Thus, in the wireless communication system 407 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the MME 162A receives the handover request indicating the radio base station devices 101B and 101C as the handover destination from the radio base station device 101A, and receives the handover request. For each of the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C shown in FIG. 1, the gateway device 161A connected between the wireless base station device 101A and the upper network, and the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C and the upper network are connected. It is determined whether or not the existing gateway devices 161B and 161C are different, and a communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway devices 161B and 161C determined to be different.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 It can be considered that the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the device 202 and the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、無線通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 Further, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
 なお、本発明の第4の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合とを説明したが、本発明に係る無線通信システムは、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEおよびS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合であっても対応することができる。 In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the case where MME switching is required in the handover operation and the case where S-GW switching is required in the handover operation have been described. However, the radio communication system according to the present invention is described. Can cope with the case where switching between MME and S-GW is necessary in the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態では、無線端末装置202の通信接続先である無線基地局装置101Aが、複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する場合について説明したが、無線端末装置202が無線基地局装置101Aから複数のハンドオーバ先の候補を示す情報を受信して、無線端末装置202が複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する構成であってもよい。 In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the case where the radio base station apparatus 101A, which is the communication connection destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202, selects a handover destination from a plurality of handover destination candidates has been described. The apparatus 202 may receive information indicating a plurality of handover destination candidates from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may select a handover destination from the plurality of handover destination candidates.
 なお、本発明の第1の実施の形態~第4の実施の形態に係る各装置の構成要素および動作のうち、一部または全部を任意に組み合わせることも可能である。 It should be noted that some or all of the components and operations of each device according to the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention can be arbitrarily combined.
 上記実施の形態は、すべての点で例示であって制限的なものではないと考えられるべきである。本発明の範囲は、上記説明ではなく請求の範囲によって示され、請求の範囲と均等の意味および範囲内でのすべての変更が含まれることが意図される。 It should be considered that the above embodiment is illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.
 11 ハンドオーバ要求部
 12 ハンドオーバ指示部
 13 ハンドオーバ条件調整部
 14 ハンドオーバ情報取得部
 15 端末測定結果取得部
 21 アンテナ
 22 サーキュレータ
 23 受信部
 24 送信部
 25 信号処理部
 26 受信信号処理部
 27 選択部
 28 通信制御部
 91 アンテナ
 92 サーキュレータ
 93 無線受信部
 94 無線送信部
 95 信号処理部
 96 受信信号処理部
 97 送信信号処理部
 98 制御部
 101A,101B,101C 無線基地局装置
 161,161A,161B,161C S-GW(ゲートウェイ装置)
 162,162A,162B,162C MME(通信制御装置)
 163 P-GW
 202 無線端末装置
 301 コアネットワーク
 302 IP網(上位ネットワーク)
 401,402,403,404,405,406,407 無線通信システム
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Handover request part 12 Handover instruction part 13 Handover condition adjustment part 14 Handover information acquisition part 15 Terminal measurement result acquisition part 21 Antenna 22 Circulator 23 Reception part 24 Transmission part 25 Signal processing part 26 Reception signal processing part 27 Selection part 28 Communication control part 91 antenna 92 circulator 93 wireless receiving unit 94 wireless transmitting unit 95 signal processing unit 96 received signal processing unit 97 transmission signal processing unit 98 control unit 101A, 101B, 101C wireless base station apparatus 161, 161A, 161B, 161C S-GW (gateway apparatus)
162, 162A, 162B, 162C MME (communication control device)
163 P-GW
202 Wireless terminal device 301 Core network 302 IP network (upper network)
401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407 Wireless communication system

Claims (31)

  1.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置であって、
     自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうためのハンドオーバ要求部と、
     前記要求に対する前記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、前記無線端末装置に対して自己の無線基地局装置から前記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるためのハンドオーバ指示部とを備え、
     前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する、無線基地局装置。
    In a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation, the radio terminal apparatus is a radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus,
    A handover request unit for making a request to perform a handover operation of a radio terminal device from its own radio base station device to another radio base station device, to the other radio base station device;
    In response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request, a handover for giving an instruction to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus An instruction unit,
    In response to the response, the handover instruction unit gives the instruction to the radio terminal device when a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality between the own radio base station device and the radio terminal device is not satisfied. A radio base station apparatus that cancels or puts on hold.
  2.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受けて、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対して前記指示を与えず、前記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を前記他の無線基地局装置に通知する、請求の範囲第1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 In response to the response, if the execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device, and cancels the handover operation. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 1, which is notified to the station apparatus.
  3.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受けて、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記実行条件が満たされるまで待機し、前記実行条件が満たされると前記無線端末装置に対して前記指示を与える、請求の範囲第1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 In response to the response, if the execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit waits until the execution condition is satisfied, and when the execution condition is satisfied, the instruction to the wireless terminal device The radio base station apparatus according to claim 1, wherein:
  4.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記実行条件が満たされる前に所定の中止条件が満たされた場合には、前記無線端末装置に対して前記指示を与えず、前記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を前記他の無線基地局装置に通知する、請求の範囲第3項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover instruction unit indicates that the handover operation is stopped without giving the instruction to the wireless terminal device when a predetermined stop condition is satisfied before the execution condition is satisfied. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 3, which is notified to the radio base station apparatus.
  5.  前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、
     前記準備条件の示す通信品質は、前記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である、請求の範囲第1項から第4項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The handover request unit makes the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
    The radio base station apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  6.  前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、
     前記準備条件の示す通信品質は、前記実行条件の示す通信品質と同等である、請求の範囲第1項から第4項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The handover request unit makes the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
    The radio base station apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  7.  前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、
     前記中止条件は、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する条件であり、
     前記準備条件の示す通信品質は、前記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて同等であるかまたは良い品質であり、前記中止条件の示す通信品質は、前記準備条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である、請求の範囲第4項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The handover request unit makes the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
    The cancellation condition is a condition related to communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus,
    The communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is equal to or better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition, and the communication quality indicated by the stop condition is good quality compared with the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 4, wherein
  8.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記ハンドオーバ動作の中止を前記他の無線基地局装置に通知する際、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質が条件を満たしていない旨を前記他の無線基地局装置に通知する、請求の範囲第2項、第4項または第7項に記載の無線基地局装置。 When the handover instruction unit notifies the other radio base station apparatus of the cancellation of the handover operation, it is determined that the communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus does not satisfy the condition. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 2, 4 or 7, which is notified to the radio base station apparatus.
  9.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     前記実行条件の示す通信品質および前記準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整するためのハンドオーバ条件調整部を備える、請求の範囲第5項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    The radio base station apparatus according to claim 5, further comprising a handover condition adjustment unit for adjusting a difference between communication quality indicated by the execution condition and communication quality indicated by the preparation condition.
  10.  前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行ない、
     前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     前記実行条件の示す通信品質および前記準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整し、前記ハンドオーバ指示部によって前記ハンドオーバ動作の中止が他の無線基地局装置に通知された回数に基づいて前記差を調整するためのハンドオーバ条件調整部を備える、請求の範囲第2項、第4項または第7項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The handover request unit makes the request to the other radio base station apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
    The radio base station device further includes:
    The difference between the communication quality indicated by the execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is adjusted, and the difference is adjusted based on the number of times the handover instruction unit is notified of the cancellation of the handover operation to another radio base station apparatus. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 2, 4 or 7, further comprising a handover condition adjustment unit for performing
  11.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作が不適切であった回数を取得するためのハンドオーバ情報取得部を備え、
     前記ハンドオーバ条件調整部は、前記ハンドオーバ情報取得部によって取得された前記回数に基づいて前記差を調整する、請求の範囲第9項または第10項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    A handover information acquisition unit for acquiring the number of times the handover operation from the own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus is inappropriate,
    The radio base station apparatus according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the handover condition adjustment unit adjusts the difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquisition unit.
  12.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置における通信制御方法であって、
     自己から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうステップと、
     前記要求に対する前記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、前記無線端末装置に対して自己から前記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップとを含み、
     前記指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップにおいては、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対して前記指示を与えず、前記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を前記他の無線基地局装置に通知する、通信制御方法。
    A communication control method in a radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus,
    Performing a request to perform a handover operation of a radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the other radio base station device;
    Determining whether to give an instruction to perform a handover operation from itself to the other radio base station apparatus in response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request; Including
    In the step of determining whether or not to give the instruction, if a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is not satisfied, the radio terminal apparatus A communication control method for notifying the other radio base station apparatus that the handover operation is to be stopped without giving the instruction.
  13.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置において用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、コンピュータに、
     自己から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうステップと、
     前記要求に対する前記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、前記無線端末装置に対して自己から前記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムであり、
     前記指示を与えるか否かを判断するステップにおいては、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対して前記指示を与えず、前記ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を前記他の無線基地局装置に通知する、通信制御プログラム。
    A communication control program used in a radio base station apparatus for transmitting / receiving a radio signal to / from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system in which the radio terminal apparatus performs communication with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. To the computer
    Performing a request to perform a handover operation of a radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the other radio base station device;
    Determining whether to give an instruction to perform a handover operation from itself to the other radio base station apparatus in response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request; Is a program for executing
    In the step of determining whether or not to give the instruction, if a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is not satisfied, the radio terminal apparatus A communication control program for notifying the other radio base station apparatus that the handover operation is to be stopped without giving the instruction.
  14.  前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、前記要求を複数の前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行う、請求の範囲第1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The radio base station apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the handover request unit makes the request to a plurality of the other radio base station apparatuses.
  15.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受信して、前記応答に対応する前記他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択し、前記無線端末装置に対して前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置への前記ハンドオーバ動作を行う指示を与える、請求の範囲第14項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover instruction unit receives the response, selects a handover destination radio base station device from the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response, and transmits the handover destination to the radio terminal device. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 14, which gives an instruction to perform a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus.
  16.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受信した後、前記応答に対応する前記他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の前記無線端末装置における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、前記測定結果に基づいて前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する、請求の範囲第15項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover instruction unit obtains a measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device of a radio signal transmitted from the other radio base station device corresponding to the response after receiving the response, and the measurement result 16. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the radio base station apparatus of the handover destination is selected based on
  17.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない前記測定結果に対応する前記他の無線基地局装置を前記ハンドオーバ先の候補から外す、請求の範囲第16項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The radio base station according to claim 16, wherein the handover instruction unit removes the other radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period after receiving the response from the handover destination candidates. Station equipment.
  18.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受信して、前記応答に対応する前記他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を前記無線端末装置へ送信する、請求の範囲第14項に記載の無線基地局装置。 15. The range according to claim 14, wherein the handover instruction unit receives the response and transmits information indicating the other radio base station apparatus corresponding to the response as a handover destination candidate to the radio terminal apparatus. Wireless base station equipment.
  19.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記無線端末装置によって選択された前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、受信した前記情報の示す前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ所定の情報を送信する、請求の範囲第18項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover instruction unit receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, and transmits predetermined information to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the received information The radio base station apparatus according to claim 18.
  20.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、前記応答に対応する前記他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ動作の中止要求を送信する、請求の範囲第14項から第19項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 After the handover operation is completed, the handover instruction unit cancels the handover operation to the other radio base station device other than the handover destination radio base station device among the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response. The radio base station apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 19, wherein the request is transmitted.
  21.  無線基地局装置との間で無線信号を送受信し、ハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な無線端末装置であって、
     自己と通信接続を確立している無線基地局装置であるサービング基地局から複数の他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を受信するための受信部と、
     前記受信部により受信された前記情報の示す複数の前記他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択するための選択部と、
     前記選択部により選択された前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を前記サービング基地局へ送信して、前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置との通信接続を新たに確立するための通信制御部とを備える、無線端末装置。
    A radio terminal apparatus capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio base station apparatus and performing a handover operation,
    A receiving unit for receiving information indicating a plurality of other radio base station devices as handover destination candidates from a serving base station that is a radio base station device that establishes a communication connection with itself;
    A selection unit for selecting a handover destination radio base station device from among the plurality of other radio base station devices indicated by the information received by the reception unit;
    A communication control unit configured to transmit information indicating the handover destination radio base station device selected by the selection unit to the serving base station and newly establish a communication connection with the handover destination radio base station device; A wireless terminal device.
  22.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムであって、
     前記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記対応の通信制御装置は、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、
     前記他の通信制御装置は、受信した前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると前記対応の通信制御装置へ前記応答を送信し、
     前記対応の通信制御装置は、前記他の通信制御装置から前記応答を受信して、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、
     前記無線基地局装置は、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する、通信システム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices,
    The radio base station apparatus transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from itself to another radio base station apparatus to a corresponding communication control apparatus,
    The corresponding communication control device, when the other radio base station device to be handed over indicated by the handover request is not a management target of itself, to the other communication control device that manages the other radio base station device Send a handover request,
    The other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and receives a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus Send
    The corresponding communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request,
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied A communication system for canceling or holding an instruction to perform a handover operation on the wireless terminal device.
  23.  前記無線基地局装置は、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記準備条件の示す通信品質は、前記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である、請求の範囲第22項に記載の通信システム。
    The radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the corresponding communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
    The communication system according to claim 22, wherein the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  24.  前記対応の通信制御装置は、前記無線基地局装置からハンドオーバ先として複数の前記他の無線基地局装置を示す前記ハンドオーバ要求を受信し、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示す前記他の無線基地局装置ごとに自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断し、自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信する、請求の範囲第22項または第23項に記載の通信システム。 The corresponding communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of the other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and self-corresponds to each other radio base station apparatus indicated by the handover request. The handover request is transmitted to another communication control apparatus that manages the other radio base station apparatus if it is not a management target of the self radio terminal station apparatus. Or the communication system according to Item 23.
  25.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを前記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、前記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムであって、
     前記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記通信制御装置は、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている前記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信し、
     前記ゲートウェイ装置は、前記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、前記上位ネットワークから送信される前記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび前記無線端末装置から送信される前記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、前記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を前記通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記通信制御装置は、前記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、
     前記無線基地局装置は、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する、通信システム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control device for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices;
    Connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal apparatus via the radio base station apparatus to the upper network and received from the upper network A communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device,
    The radio base station apparatus transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from itself to another radio base station apparatus to the communication control apparatus,
    The communication control apparatus includes a gateway apparatus connected between the radio base station apparatus and the upper network, and the other radio base station apparatus at the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network. When the connected gateway device is different, a communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network,
    When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the gateway device can relay the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network. Create a communication path, send a communication path creation response to the communication path creation request to the communication control device,
    When the communication control apparatus receives the communication path creation response, the communication control apparatus transmits the handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and receives the response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the handover request A handover instruction to the wireless base station device of the transmission source of
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied A communication system that stops or suspends giving an instruction to perform a handover operation on the wireless terminal device.
  26.  前記無線基地局装置は、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記準備条件の示す通信品質は、前記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である、請求の範囲第25項に記載の通信システム。
    The radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition relating to communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
    26. The communication system according to claim 25, wherein the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  27.  前記通信制御装置は、前記無線基地局装置からハンドオーバ先として複数の他の前記無線基地局装置を示す前記ハンドオーバ要求を受信し、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示す前記他の無線基地局装置ごとに、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なるか否かを判断し、異なると判断した前記ゲートウェイ装置へ前記通信経路作成要求を送信する、請求の範囲第25項または第26項に記載の通信システム。 The communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and transmits the radio request for each of the other radio base station apparatuses indicated by the handover request. Determining whether a gateway device connected between a base station device and the upper network is different from a gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network; 27. The communication system according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device determined to be different.
  28.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、
     前記他の通信制御装置が、受信した前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると前記対応の通信制御装置へ前記応答を送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記他の通信制御装置から前記応答を受信して、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む、通信制御方法。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the corresponding communication control device;
    When the other radio base station apparatus that is the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the corresponding communication control apparatus, the corresponding communication control apparatus is directed to another communication control apparatus that manages the other radio base station apparatus. Sending a handover request;
    When the other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus and receives a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the response is sent to the corresponding communication control apparatus. A step of sending
    The corresponding communication control apparatus receiving the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request;
    When the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied Includes a step of canceling or suspending the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation on the wireless terminal device.
  29.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを前記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、前記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている前記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記ゲートウェイ装置が、前記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、前記上位ネットワークから送信される前記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび前記無線端末装置から送信される前記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、前記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む、通信制御方法。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control device for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices;
    Connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal apparatus via the radio base station apparatus to the upper network and received from the upper network A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the communication control device;
    The communication control device is connected between the gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, and the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network. If the connected gateway device is different, transmitting a communication path creation request to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network;
    When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the gateway device can relay the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network. Creating a communication path and transmitting a communication path creation response to the communication path creation request to the communication control device;
    When the communication control device receives the communication path creation response, transmits the handover request to the other radio base station device, and receives the response to the handover request from the other radio base station device, the handover request Transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus of the transmission source of
    When the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied Includes a step of canceling or suspending the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation on the wireless terminal device.
  30.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、
     コンピュータに、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、
     前記他の通信制御装置が、受信した前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると前記対応の通信制御装置へ前記応答を送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記他の通信制御装置から前記応答を受信して、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるための、通信制御プログラム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control program used in a communication system including a plurality of communication control devices for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices,
    On the computer,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the corresponding communication control device;
    When the other radio base station apparatus that is the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the corresponding communication control apparatus, the corresponding communication control apparatus is directed to another communication control apparatus that manages the other radio base station apparatus. Sending a handover request;
    When the other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus and receives a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the response is sent to the corresponding communication control apparatus. A step of sending
    The corresponding communication control apparatus receiving the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request;
    When the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied A communication control program for executing a step of canceling or suspending the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation on the wireless terminal device.
  31.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを前記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、前記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、
     コンピュータに、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている前記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記ゲートウェイ装置が、前記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、前記上位ネットワークから送信される前記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび前記無線端末装置から送信される前記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、前記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるための、通信制御プログラム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control device for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices;
    Connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal apparatus via the radio base station apparatus to the upper network and received from the upper network A communication control program used in a communication system including a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device,
    On the computer,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the communication control device;
    The communication control device is connected between the gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, and the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network. If the connected gateway device is different, transmitting a communication path creation request to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network;
    When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the gateway device can relay the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network. Creating a communication path and transmitting a communication path creation response to the communication path creation request to the communication control device;
    When the communication control device receives the communication path creation response, transmits the handover request to the other radio base station device, and receives the response to the handover request from the other radio base station device, the handover request Transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus of the transmission source of
    When the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied A communication control program for executing a step of canceling or suspending the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation on the wireless terminal device.
PCT/JP2012/071716 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program WO2013077052A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2011-255530 2011-11-22
JP2011255531 2011-11-22
JP2011-255531 2011-11-22
JP2011255530 2011-11-22
JP2012-000609 2012-01-05
JP2012000609 2012-01-05
JP2012092630A JP5263563B2 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-04-16 Radio base station apparatus, radio terminal apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2012-092629 2012-04-16
JP2012-092630 2012-04-16
JP2012092629A JP6111529B2 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-04-16 Radio base station apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013077052A1 true WO2013077052A1 (en) 2013-05-30

Family

ID=48469511

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/071716 WO2013077052A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program
PCT/JP2012/071715 WO2013077051A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/071715 WO2013077051A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (2) WO2013077052A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170251405A1 (en) * 2014-10-03 2017-08-31 Intel IP Corporation Packet data network connection establishment during handover
JP2018137495A (en) * 2015-07-10 2018-08-30 シャープ株式会社 Terminal device, base station device, and communication method
CN112566191A (en) * 2019-09-26 2021-03-26 中国移动通信集团安徽有限公司 Cell switching method, device, equipment and computer storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000197090A (en) * 1998-12-28 2000-07-14 Hitachi Ltd Base station controller, mobile communication system and hands-off method
JP2001251658A (en) * 1999-12-28 2001-09-14 Ntt Docomo Inc Hand-over control method and system
JP2008508829A (en) * 2004-08-02 2008-03-21 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド Method for performing handover in broadband wireless access system
JP2011004292A (en) * 2009-06-19 2011-01-06 Ntt Docomo Inc Radio communication system, radio control device, and handover control method

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4298692B2 (en) * 2005-10-18 2009-07-22 京セラ株式会社 Mobile terminal and communication method
JP4795045B2 (en) * 2006-02-14 2011-10-19 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ Mobile station, radio access network apparatus, and mobility control method
JP4319676B2 (en) * 2006-11-24 2009-08-26 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ Wireless communication terminal and wireless communication method
JP4992593B2 (en) * 2007-07-26 2012-08-08 富士通モバイルコミュニケーションズ株式会社 Mobile radio terminal device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000197090A (en) * 1998-12-28 2000-07-14 Hitachi Ltd Base station controller, mobile communication system and hands-off method
JP2001251658A (en) * 1999-12-28 2001-09-14 Ntt Docomo Inc Hand-over control method and system
JP2008508829A (en) * 2004-08-02 2008-03-21 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド Method for performing handover in broadband wireless access system
JP2011004292A (en) * 2009-06-19 2011-01-06 Ntt Docomo Inc Radio communication system, radio control device, and handover control method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2013077051A1 (en) 2013-05-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5757203B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, communication control method, and communication control program
RU2668071C1 (en) Communication optimization method and device
US9980188B2 (en) User mobility control for heterogeneous wireless networks
EP2763461B1 (en) Radio resource control connection reestablishment method
JP6319603B2 (en) Cell handover method, base station, and system
JP5922145B2 (en) Communication system, radio communication node, and communication control method
EP3520495B1 (en) Cellular telecommunications network
US20130250908A1 (en) Base station power savings and control thereof
EP3520498B1 (en) Cellular telecommunications network
US20130084871A1 (en) Radio base station and method of controlling the same
WO2013048331A1 (en) Cell size and shape estimation in heterogeneous networks
JP6467543B2 (en) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, PROCESSOR AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD
JP6111529B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
WO2013077052A1 (en) Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program
WO2016047672A1 (en) Wireless base station and wireless terminal
JP5263563B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, radio terminal apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2013110728A (en) Radio communication system, radio base station device, communication control method and communication control program
JP2013121087A (en) Radio base station device, radio terminal device, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2013201586A (en) Radio terminal device, radio base station devices, communication control device, management device, communication control method, and communication control program
JP5842570B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2013110727A (en) Radio communication system, radio terminal device, communication control method and communication control program
WO2013141344A1 (en) Wireless terminal device, wireless base station device, communication control device, management device, communication control method, and communication control program
WO2013084704A1 (en) Wireless base-station device, wireless terminal device, method for controlling communication, and communication-control program
US10039034B1 (en) Controlling handover based on confidence in response to load-information request
JP2013201585A (en) Radio terminal device, radio base station devices, communication control device, management device, communication control method, and communication control program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12851488

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12851488

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1